4. 分别品义注巴利 4. Vibhaṅgavaggo
259 段
《一夜贤者经》的注释巴利
1. Bhaddekarattasuttavaṇṇanā
272 “如是我闻”这一段,说的就是《一夜贤者经》。其中,“贤者的一夜”:是因为具足了观禅的修习,所以有一个美好的一夜。“总纲”:就是纲要。“分别”:就是详细展开解释。巴利
272.Evaṃme sutanti bhaddekarattasuttaṃ. Tattha bhaddekarattassāti vipassanānuyogasamannāgatattā bhaddakassa ekarattassa. Uddesanti mātikaṃ. Vibhaṅganti vitthārabhājanīyaṃ.
“过去”是指过去的五蕴。“不应随行”是指不应以渴爱和邪见去追随。“不应期望”是指不应以渴爱和邪见去期盼。“那些过去”这句话在这里是用来说明原因的。因为凡是过去的,都已经被断除、已经息灭、已经消失,所以不应再去追随;又因为凡是未来的,都还没有到达、还没有生起、还没有产生,所以也不应去期盼。巴利
Atītanti atīte pañcakkhandhe. Nānvāgameyyāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi nānugaccheyya. Nappaṭikaṅkheti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi na pattheyya. Yadatītanti idamettha kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā yaṃ atītaṃ, taṃ pahīnaṃ niruddhaṃ atthaṅgataṃ, tasmā taṃ puna nānugaccheyya. Yasmā ca yaṃ anāgataṃ, taṃ appattaṃ ajātaṃ anibbattaṃ, tasmā tampi na pattheyya.
“处处”是说:对于当下生起的法,无论它在什么地方生起,就在那个地方,以无常随观等七种观法去观察它;如果是在林野等地方,也就在那里观察。“不可动摇、不可扰动”:这句话是为了显示观与再观。因为观确实不会被贪等烦恼所动摇、所扰动,所以叫不可动摇、不可扰动。应当修习它、增长它,应当再再观察它,这就是这句话的意思。另一种解释是:涅槃不会被贪等烦恼所动摇、所扰动,所以叫不可动摇、不可扰动。有智慧、贤明的比丘应当修习它,意思是:反复以涅槃为所缘,进入各种果等至,从而不断增长它。巴利
Tattha tatthāti paccuppannampi dhammaṃ yattha yattheva uppanno, tattha tattheva ca naṃ aniccānupassanādīhi sattahi anupassanāhi yo vipassati araññādīsu vā tattha tattheva vipassati. Asaṃhīraṃasaṃkuppanti idaṃ vipassanāpaṭivipassanādassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Vipassanā hi rāgādīhi na saṃhīrati na saṃkuppatīti asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ anubrūhaye vaḍḍheyya, paṭivipasseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā nibbānaṃ rāgādīhi na saṃhīrati na saṃkuppatīti asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ. Taṃ vidvā paṇḍito bhikkhu anubrūhaye, punappunaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ taṃ taṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appento vaḍḍheyyāti attho.
对于正在修习增长的人,为了他的利益,世尊开示说:“就在今天,就该努力精进。”以燃烧、煎逼烦恼而得名的精进力,今天就应该付诸实行。“谁知道死亡明天会不会来?”——明天到底是还活着,还是死去,谁能知道呢?这是为了说明:不要生起“今天还有些杂事没办完,明天或后天再做吧”这样的心,而应该生起“我今天就要布施,我今天就要持戒,或者今天就要做其他某种善行”的精进力,今天就要去做。“拥有大军”:火、毒、刀剑等许多导致死亡的因素,就是死王的大军。因为拥有这样庞大的军队,所以面对这样的死王,没有所谓“请再等几天,等我做完供佛等自己的要紧事”这种朋友交情式的约定;也没有“请收下这成百上千的财物,再宽限几天”这种行贿式的约定;更没有“我要用这支强大的军队把你打退”这种以武力对抗的约定。这里说的“约定”,指的就是朋友交情、行贿、武力对抗这三种方式。因此,这个道理就被阐明了。巴利
Tassa pana anubrūhantassa atthāya – ajjeva kiccamātappanti kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanena ātappanti laddhanāmaṃ vīriyaṃ ajjeva kātabbaṃ. Ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suveti sve jīvitaṃ vā maraṇaṃ vā ko jānāti. Ajjeva dānaṃ vā dassāmi, sīlaṃ vā rakkhissāmi, aññataraṃ vā pana kusalaṃ karissāmīti hi ‘‘ajja tāva papañco atthi, sve vā punadivase vā karissāmī’’ti cittaṃ anuppādetvā ajjeva karissāmīti evaṃ vīriyaṃ kātabbanti dasseti. Mahāsenenāti aggivisasatthādīni anekāni maraṇakāraṇāni tassa senā, tāya mahatiyā senāya vasena mahāsenena evarūpena maccunā saddhiṃ ‘‘katipāhaṃ tāva āgamehi yāvāhaṃ buddhapūjādiṃ attano avassayakammaṃ karomī’’ti . Evaṃ mittasanthavākārasaṅkhāto vā, ‘‘idaṃ sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā gahetvā katipāhaṃ āgamehī’’ti evaṃ lañjānuppadānasaṅkhāto vā, ‘‘imināhaṃ balarāsinā paṭibāhissāmī’’ti evaṃ balarāsisaṅkhāto vā saṅgaro natthi. Saṅgaroti hi mittasanthavākāralañjānuppadānabalarāsīnaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmā ayamattho vutto.
不放逸,就是不懈怠、肯精勤努力。因为这样修行,他就有了一个善好的夜晚,所以叫一夜贤善者。就这样,对那位如此修行的人,称他为这是一位一夜贤善者。已寂静的佛陀圣者,因为贪等烦恼都已止息,所以这样宣说。巴利
Atanditanti analasaṃ uṭṭhāhakaṃ. Evaṃ paṭipannattā bhaddo ekaratto assāti bhaddekaratto. Iti taṃ evaṃ paṭipannapuggalaṃ ‘‘bhaddekaratto aya’’nti. Rāgādīnaṃ santatāya santo buddhamuni ācikkhati.
273 在“如是色”等说法里,意思是:即使原本是黑色的,也变成了像蓝宝石那样的颜色——这只是就可爱的色相而言,说“我曾是这样的色”。只是就善的、伴随喜乐的乐受而言,说“我曾是这样的受”。只是就与它相应的想、行、识而言,说“我曾是这样的想、这样的行、这样的识”。这些都是就过去的时间而说的。巴利
273.Evaṃrūpotiādīsu kāḷopi samāno indanīlamaṇivaṇṇo ahosinti evaṃ manuññarūpavaseneva evaṃrūpo ahosiṃ. Kusalasukhasomanassavedanāvaseneva evaṃvedano. Taṃsampayuttānaṃyeva saññādīnaṃ vasena evaṃsañño evaṃsaṅkhāro evaṃviññāṇo ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti.
在这里,“随入喜”是指:对色等那些对象,让渴爱跟着生起、持续运转。但如果是低劣的色等,他就不会这样认为:“我曾经有如此的色……我曾经有如此的识。”巴利
Tattha nandiṃ samanvānetīti tesu rūpādīsu taṇhaṃ samanvāneti anupavatteti. Hīnarūpādivasena pana evaṃrūpo ahosiṃ…pe… evaṃviññāṇo ahosinti na maññati.
不让喜随入,就是不让渴爱转起,也不让与渴爱相应的邪见转起。巴利
Nandiṃ na samanvānetīti taṇhaṃ vā taṇhāsampayuttadiṭṭhiṃ vā nānupavattayati.
274 对于“我有这样的色”等说法,也应该知道,那只是依着那些令人欢喜的色等,被称为渴爱和邪见生起的随喜罢了。巴利
274.Evaṃrūpo siyantiādīsupi taṃmanuññarūpādivaseneva taṇhādiṭṭhipavattasaṅkhātā nandisamanvānayanāva veditabbā.
275 比丘们,怎样在现在诸法上被牵引呢?这段话是为了解释“对现在法处处随观,无牵引、不动”这一论题的释义。在这里,按理本应说“比丘们,怎样对现在法不随观”等等,但因为“无牵引”和“不动”说的就是观,所以为了显示观的没有和存在这两种情况,就提出“被牵引”作为纲目来详细解说。其中,“被牵引”是指因为没有观,被渴爱和邪见所牵引;“不被牵引”是指因为有观,不被渴爱和邪见所牵引。其余各处都浅显易懂。巴利
275.Kathañca, bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīratīti idaṃ ‘‘paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati. Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppa’’nti uddesassa niddesatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāmañcettha ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, paccuppannaṃ dhammaṃ na vipassatī’’tiādi vattabbaṃ siyā, yasmā pana asaṃhīrāti ca asaṃkuppāti ca vipassanā vuttā, tasmā tassā eva abhāvañca bhāvañca dassetuṃ saṃhīratīti mātikaṃ uddharitvā vitthāro vutto. Tattha saṃhīratīti vipassanāya abhāvato taṇhādiṭṭhīhi ākaḍḍhiyati. Na saṃhīratīti vipassanāya bhāvena taṇhādiṭṭhīhi nākaḍḍhiyati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
2. 《阿难一夜贤者经》的注释巴利
2. Ānandabhaddekarattasuttavaṇṇanā
276 “如是我闻”这句,就是《阿难一夜贤者经》。其中,“出隐居”是指从果定中出定。“诸比丘,是谁呢?”——他明明知道,却还是这样问,是为了引出话题。巴利
276.Evaṃme sutanti ānandabhaddekarattasuttaṃ. Tattha paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhito. Ko nu kho, bhikkhaveti jānantova kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ pucchi.
278 “萨度,萨度!”这是对长老表示赞叹。接着说的“萨度,你确实……”是世尊在赞叹长老以圆满、清净的语句说法。其余各处都很清楚明白。巴利
278.Sādhu sādhūti therassa sādhukāramadāsi. Sādhu kho tvanti parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehi parisuddhehi kathitattā desanaṃ pasaṃsanto āha. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
3. 玛哈咖佳亚那一夜贤者经的注释巴利
3. Mahākaccānabhaddekarattasuttavaṇṇanā
279 “如是我闻”这句话,就是《玛哈咖佳亚那一夜贤者经》的开头。其中“温泉园”这个名称,是因为那里有一个热水湖,园林因此得名。据说,在毗婆罗山下面,有地居龙的龙宫,方圆五百由旬,像天界一样,地面是宝石铺成的,还有园林和苑囿。那里有龙王嬉戏的大湖,从湖中流出一条叫“温泉”的河,河水沸腾,是滚烫的热水。为什么这条河会变成这样呢?据说,王舍城周围是一大片饿鬼世界,这条温泉河从两座大铁锅地狱中间流过来,所以它沸腾着流淌。经里也这样说:“比丘们,这条温泉河流过的地方,湖水清澈、清凉、甘甜、洁白,有很好的下水处,令人欢喜,有很多鱼和龟,还有车轮那么大的莲花开放。可是,比丘们,这条温泉河是从两座大地狱中间流过来的,所以它沸腾着流淌。”(《巴拉基格》231)而在这座园林正对面的地方,从那个大湖又形成了一个大水池,这座寺院就因为那个水池的名字,被称为“温泉园”。巴利
279.Evaṃme sutanti mahākaccānabhaddekarattasuttaṃ. Tattha tapodārāmeti tattodakassa rahadassa vasena evaṃladdhanāme ārāme. Vebhārapabbatassa kira heṭṭhā bhūmaṭṭhakanāgānaṃ pañcayojanasatikaṃ nāgabhavanaṃ devalokasadisaṃ maṇimayena talena ārāmauyyānehi ca samannāgataṃ, tattha nāgānaṃ kīḷanaṭṭhāne mahāudakarahado, tato tapodā nāma nadī sandati kuthitā uṇhodakā. Kasmā panesā edisā jātā? Rājagahaṃ kira parivāretvā mahā petaloko, tattha dvinnaṃ mahālohakumbhinirayānaṃ antarena ayaṃ tapodā āgacchati, tasmā sā kuthitā sandati. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘yatāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā sandati, so daho acchodako sītodako sātodako setodako suppatittho ramaṇīyo pahūtamacchakacchapo, cakkamattāni ca padumāni pupphanti . Apicāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchati, tenāyaṃ tapodā kuthitā sandatī’’ti (pārā. 231). Imassa pana ārāmassa abhisammukhaṭṭhāne tato mahāudakarahado jāto, tassa nāmavasenāyaṃ vihāro tapodārāmoti vuccati.
280 萨米提:据说这位长老的肉身圆满、容貌端正、令人欢喜,因此就得到了“萨米提”这个称呼。前梵行:指作为道梵行的开端,属于前行之道。善逝如此说已,便从座起身:这一段应当依照《蜜丸经》(《中部》1.199等)中所说的方式详细展开。巴利
280.Samiddhīti tassa kira therassa attabhāvo samiddho abhirūpo pāsādiko, tasmā samiddhitveva saṅkhaṃ gato. Ādibrahmacariyakoti maggabrahmacariyassa ādi pubbabhāgappaṭipattibhūto. Idaṃ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanāti madhupiṇḍikasutte (ma. ni. 1.199 ādayo) vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ.
282 “我的眼是如此”——在这部经里,世尊其实只是依十二处来安立论母。长老也掌握了这个理路:“世尊在下面两部经和上面第四部经这三部经中,是依五取蕴来作论母和分别的;但在这里,则是为了依十二处作分别解说而安立了论母。”于是他这样说了。长老获得这个理路后,做了一件了不起的事:在无路之处示出路,在虚空中留下足迹。因此,世尊就这部经而说:“比丘们,在我的比丘声闻弟子中,对于我简要所说的法义,能详细分析其义理的,玛哈咖佳亚那最为第一。”(《增支部》1.197)将他置于最上之位。在这里,“眼”指眼净色。“色”指四大所造色,依此方式,其余诸处也应如此理解。“识”指带有爱染的识。“他对此欢喜”,是指以渴爱与邪见的方式欢喜那眼与色。“随之而行”,是指以渴爱与邪见而随行。巴利
282.Iti me cakkhunti imasmiṃ kira sutte bhagavā dvādasāyatanavaseneva mātikaṃ ṭhapesi. Theropi ‘‘bhagavatā heṭṭhā dvīsu, upari catutthe cāti imesu tīsu suttesu pañcakkhandhavasena mātikā ca vibhaṅgo ca kato, idha pana dvādasāyatanavaseneva vibhajanatthaṃ mātikā ṭhapitā’’ti nayaṃ paṭilabhitvā evamāha. Imaṃ pana nayaṃ labhantena therena bhāriyaṃ kataṃ, apade padaṃ dassitaṃ, ākāse padaṃ kataṃ, tena naṃ bhagavā imameva suttaṃ sandhāya – ‘‘etadaggaṃ , bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajantānaṃ yadidaṃ mahākaccāno’’ti (a. ni. 1.197) etadagge ṭhapesi. Ettha pana cakkhūti cakkhupasādo. Rūpāti catusamuṭṭhānikarūpā. Iminā nayena sesāyatanānipi veditabbāni. Viññāṇanti nikantiviññāṇaṃ. Tadabhinandatīti taṃ cakkhuñceva rūpañca taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinandati. Anvāgametīti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi anugacchati.
我的意在过去是这样,法是这样——在这里,“意”指有分心;“法”指三界法所缘。巴利
Iti me mano ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti dhammāti ettha pana manoti bhavaṅgacittaṃ. Dhammāti tebhūmakadhammārammaṇaṃ.
283 “Paṇidahati(发愿、确立)”:是以愿求的方式把它安立下来。“Paṇidhānapaccayā(以愿求为缘)”:是以安立愿求作为原因。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
283.Paṇidahatīti patthanāvasena ṭhapesi. Paṇidhānapaccayāti patthanāṭṭhapanakāraṇā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
4. 罗玛萨坎吉亚一夜贤者经的注释巴利
4. Lomasakaṅgiyabhaddekarattasuttavaṇṇanā
286 如是我闻这句,是《罗玛萨坎吉亚一夜贤者经》的开头。其中“洛玛桑吉亚”是一位长老的名字——据说他身体稍微有些毛茸茸的样子,因此就以“洛玛桑吉亚”这个称呼为人所知。“旃檀天子”呢,据说在迦叶正自觉佛时代,有一位名叫旃檀的在家居士,家财丰厚,他以四种资具供养了三宝,命终之后投生到天界;由于仍沿用原来的名字,所以被称为“旃檀天子”。“在黄色毛毯石上”,就是在红色毛毯石上。据说那块石头的颜色就像一堆胜意花,所以被称为“黄色毛毯石”。巴利
286.Evaṃme sutanti lomasakaṅgiyabhaddekarattasuttaṃ. Tattha lomasakaṅgiyoti aṅgathero kira nāmesa, kāyassa pana īsakalomasākāratāya lomasakaṅgiyoti pākaṭo jāto. Candanodevaputtoti kassapasammāsambuddhakāle kiresa candano nāma upāsako aḍḍho mahaddhano tīṇi ratanāni catūhi paccayehi pūjetvā devaloke nibbatto, purimanāmena candano devaputtotveva saṅkhaṃ gato. Paṇḍukambalasilāyanti rattakambalasilāyaṃ. Tassā kira rattakambalasseva jayasumanapuppharāsi viya vaṇṇo, tasmā ‘‘paṇḍukambalasilā’’ti vuccati.
那么,世尊是什么时候住在那里呢?世尊在成道后的第七年,于舍卫城阿沙荼月满月那天,在十二由旬的大众中间示现了双神变,然后从空中降下,坐在藤亭树下铺设的胜妙佛座上,以说法把大众从大危难中救拔出来。因为诸佛示现神变之后不会住在人间,所以世尊就在那些大众亲眼看着的情况下迈步离去,前往三十三天,在巴利恰答咖树下、红毯石上进入雨安居。正是在那个时候,世尊住在那里。巴利
Kadā pana tattha bhagavā vihāsīti? Bodhipattito sattame saṃvacchare sāvatthiyaṃ āsāḷhīmāsapuṇṇamāya dvādasayojanāya parisāya majjhe yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā oruyha kaṇḍambamūle paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīditvā dhammadesanāya mahājanaṃ mahāviduggato uddharitvā buddhā nāma yasmā pāṭihāriyaṃ katvā manussapathe na vasanti, tasmā passamānasseva tassa janassa padavīkkamaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ vassaṃ upagato, tasmiṃ samaye vihāsi.
“在那里,世尊”是指:当时住在那里说法的世尊,大多数情况下由来自一万个轮围世界的天众聚集围绕。他让母亲成为身证者后,宣说阿毗达摩藏,讲的是甚深、微细、触及三法印、分别色与非色的教说。有些天神无法通达这些法,为了让他们生起悚惧,世尊在说法中间穿插开示了《贤善一夜者》的总说和详释。那时,这位天子在学习时,连同详释一起学了这些偈颂,但因为天人的身份本来就耽著于放逸,又被种种天界所缘不断逼迫,他渐渐把经文忘失了,只记住了偈颂本身。因此他说:“比丘,我就是这样忆持《贤善一夜者》偈颂的。”巴利
Tatra bhagavāti tatra viharanto bhagavā yebhuyyena dasahi cakkavāḷasahassehi sannipatitāhi devatāhi parivuto mātaraṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ kathento gambhīraṃ nipuṇaṃ tilakkhaṇāhataṃ rūpārūpaparicchedakathaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ asakkontānaṃ devānaṃ saṃvegajananatthaṃ antarantarā bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsi. Tatrāyaṃ devaputto uggaṇhanto imā gāthā saddhiṃ vibhaṅgena uggaṇhi, devattassa pana pamādādhiṭṭhānattā dibbehi ārammaṇehi nippīḷiyamāno anupubbena suttaṃ sammuṭṭho gāthāmattameva dhāresi. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ kho ahaṃ bhikkhu dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’’ti.
在“学习”等词中,默然坐着听闻的人,叫做“学习”;出声诵习的人,叫做“掌握”;让别人念诵的人,叫做“持”。这里剩下的内容都很浅显。巴利
Uggaṇhāhitvantiādīsu tuṇhībhūto nisīditvā suṇanto uggaṇhāti nāma, vācāya sajjhāyaṃ karonto pariyāpuṇāti nāma, aññesaṃ vācento dhāreti nāma. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.
5.《小业分别经》的注释巴利
5. Cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
289 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《小业分别经》。在这部经里,须跋——据说他长得俊美又端庄,因为四肢匀称端正,大家就给他起了“须跋”这个名字。至于“青年”,那是他年轻时的称呼,到了年老时,人们还是用这个称呼叫他。“多迭亚之子”,是说他是波斯匿王的国师、一位名叫多迭亚的婆罗门的儿子。据说离舍卫城不远有个叫杜迪的村子,他因为是那个村的领主,所以被称为“多迭亚”。他拥有八十七千万的巨额财富,却极其吝啬。他心想:“布施财物的人,家产没有不耗尽的。”因此什么都不肯给任何人。关于这一点,也有偈颂这样说——巴利
289.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha subhoti so kira dassanīyo ahosi pāsādiko, tenassa aṅgasubhatāya subhotveva nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Māṇavoti pana taṃ taruṇakāle vohariṃsu, so mahallakakālepi teneva vohārena vohariyati. Todeyyaputtoti todeyyassa nāma pasenadirañño purohitabrāhmaṇassa putto. So kira sāvatthiyā avidūre tudigāmo nāma atthi, tassa adhipatittā todeyyoti saṅkhaṃ gato. Mahādhano pana hoti sattāsītikoṭivibhavo paramamaccharī, ‘‘dadato bhogānaṃ aparikkhayo nāma natthī’’ti cintetvā kassaci kiñci na deti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 见眼药尽,蚁堆积,
蜂蜜聚时,智者当住家中。”巴利
‘‘Añjanānaṃ khayaṃ disvā, vammikānañca sañcayaṃ; Madhūnañca samāhāraṃ, paṇḍito gharamāvase’’ti.
他就是这样教导布施的。那时,正自觉者住在负重精舍,多迭亚婆罗门连一勺粥、一匙饭都不肯施舍给佛陀,因为贪恋钱财,死后就投生在自己家里的狗胎中。须跋非常疼爱这只狗,拿自己吃的饭喂它,还把它抱到华丽的床榻上让它睡。后来有一天,世尊在破晓时分观察世间,看见了这只狗,便知道:“多迭亚婆罗门因为贪财,投生成了自己家中的狗。今天我到须跋家去,这狗一见到我就会吠叫。那时我对它说一句话,它就会明白‘沙门乔达摩认得我’,然后走到灶边躺下。由此因缘,须跋会和我有一番交谈;他听了法之后,就会皈依三宝。而这狗死后,会堕入地狱。”世尊知道这位青年将会皈依三宝,就在那天整理好身体,独自一人进入村子,等青年外出后,便走进他家乞食。巴利
Evaṃ adānameva sikkhāpesi. Dhuravihāre vasato sammāsambuddhassa yāguuḷuṅgamattaṃ vā bhattakaṭacchumattaṃ vā adatvā dhanalobhena kālaṃ katvā tasmiṃyeva ghare sunakho hutvā nibbatto. Subho taṃ sunakhaṃ ativiya piyāyati , attano bhuñjanakabhattaṃyeva bhojeti, ukkhipitvā varasayane sayāpeti. Atha bhagavā ekadivasaṃ paccūsasamaye lokaṃ volokento taṃ sunakhaṃ disvā – ‘‘todeyyabrāhmaṇo dhanalobhena attanova ghare sunakho hutvā nibbatto, ajja mayi subhassa gharaṃ gate maṃ disvā sunakho bhukkāraṃ karissati, athassāhaṃ ekaṃ vacanaṃ vakkhāmi, so ‘jānāti maṃ samaṇo gotamo’ti gantvā uddhanaṭṭhāne nipajjissati. Tatonidānaṃ subhassa mayā saddhiṃ eko kathāsallāpo bhavissati, so dhammaṃ sutvā saraṇesu patiṭṭhahissati, sunakho pana kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbattissatī’’ti imaṃ māṇavassa saraṇesu patiṭṭhānabhāvaṃ ñatvā bhagavā taṃ divasaṃ sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā ekakova gāmaṃ pavisitvā nikkhante māṇave taṃ gharaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi.
那只狗看见世尊,一边吠叫一边走到世尊跟前。于是世尊这样说:“多迭亚,你过去也以‘喂,尊者’这样的话轻慢我,从而投生成了狗,现在又对我吠叫,你将因此堕入无间地狱。”狗听了这话,心想“沙门乔达摩知道我了”,心生后悔,便低下头,走到灶灰间躺下。人们试图把它抱到床上让它睡,却没能做到。须跋来了,问道:“是谁把这只狗从床上弄下来的?”人们说:“不是任何人。”然后把这件事告诉了他。须跋听说后,心想:“我的父亲生在梵天界,根本没有叫多迭亚的狗。沙门乔达摩把父亲说成是狗,无论他嘴里说出什么话(都是谎言)”,于是生气地想去以妄语罪责难世尊,便前往寺院询问此事。巴利
Sunakho bhagavantaṃ disvā bhukkāraṃ karonto bhagavato samīpaṃ gato. Tato naṃ bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘todeyya tvaṃ pubbepi maṃ bho bhoti paribhavitvā sunakho jāto, idānipi bhukkāraṃ katvā avīciṃ gamissasī’’ti. Sunakho taṃ sutvā – ‘‘jānāti maṃ samaṇo gotamo’’ti vippaṭisārī hutvā gīvaṃ onāmetvā uddhanantare chārikāyaṃ nipanno. Manussā ukkhipitvā sayane sayāpetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Subho āgantvā – ‘‘kenāyaṃ sunakho sayanā oropito’’ti āha. Manussā na kenacīti vatvā taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesuṃ. Māṇavo sutvā – ‘‘mama pitā brahmaloke nibbatto, todeyyo nāma sunakho natthi. Samaṇo pana gotamo pitaraṃ sunakhaṃ karoti, yaṃkiñci esa mukhāruḷhaṃ bhāsatī’’ti kujjhitvā bhagavantaṃ musāvādena niggahetukāmo vihāraṃ gantvā taṃ pavattiṃ pucchi.
世尊也同样对他说了那番话,为了不让他觉得受骗,又问道:“年轻人,你父亲有没有没告诉过你什么财物?”他回答说:“乔达摩尊者,有一条价值十万迦哈巴那的金项链、一双价值十万迦哈巴那的金鞋、一个价值十万迦哈巴那的金钵,还有十万迦哈巴那。”世尊说:“你去用没有水的乳粥喂那只狗,把它抱到床上,等它刚一入睡就问它,它会把一切都告诉你。那时你就会知道:‘这是我的父亲。’”年轻人心想:“如果是真的,我就能得到财宝;如果不是,我就可以指责沙门乔达摩说妄语。”出于这两个理由,他高兴地去了,并照做了。那只狗心想:“我被这个人认出来了。”便呜呜地哭着,走到藏宝的地方,用脚刨地,给出了暗示。年轻人拿到财宝后,心想:“连被转生所遮蔽的、如此微细的结生间隔,沙门乔达摩都清清楚楚地知道,他一定是遍知者。”于是对世尊生起了信心,并准备了十四个问题。据说他是一位学相术的人,因此他想:“我要带着这份法的供养去问沙门乔达摩问题。”于是第二次前往世尊那里。对于他所问的问题,世尊一口气就作了解答,开口便说“众生以业为自有”等。巴利
Bhagavāpi tassa tatheva vatvā avisaṃvādanatthaṃ āha – ‘‘atthi pana te māṇava pitarā anakkhātaṃ dhana’’nti . Atthi, bho gotama, satasahassagghanikā suvaṇṇamālā satasahassagghanikā suvaṇṇapādukā satasahassagghanikā suvaṇṇapāti satasahassañca kahāpaṇanti. Gaccha taṃ sunakhaṃ appodakapāyāsaṃ bhojāpetvā sayane āropetvā īsakaṃ niddaṃ okkantakāle puccha, sabbaṃ te ācikkhissati. Atha naṃ jāneyyāsi ‘‘pitā me eso’’ti. Māṇavo – ‘‘sace saccaṃ bhavissati, dhanaṃ lacchāmi, no ce, samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ musāvādena niggaṇhissāmī’’ti dvīhipi kāraṇehi tuṭṭho gantvā tathā akāsi. Sunakho – ‘‘ñātomhi iminā’’ti roditvā huṃ hunti karonto dhananidhānaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā pādena pathaviṃ khaṇitvā saññaṃ adāsi, māṇavo dhanaṃ gahetvā – ‘‘bhavapaṭicchannaṃ nāma evaṃ sukhumaṃ paṭisandhiantaraṃ pākaṭaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa, addhā esa sabbaññū’’ti bhagavati pasannacitto cuddasa pañhe abhisaṅkhari. Aṅgavijjāpāṭhako kiresa, tenassa etadahosi – ‘‘idaṃ dhammapaṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pañhe pucchissāmī’’ti dutiyagamanena yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, tena puṭṭhapañhe pana bhagavā ekappahāreneva vissajjento kammassakātiādimāha.
在这里,业是这些众生自己的东西,是他们自己的财产,所以叫“以业为自有”。他们是业的继承人,也就是业是他们的遗产和财产,所以叫“以业为继承”。业是这些众生的根源和原因,所以叫“以业为起源”。业是这些众生的亲属,也就是业是他们的亲族,所以叫“以业为亲属”。业是这些众生的皈依处和依靠,所以叫“以业为皈依”。所谓“依低劣与殊胜的差别”,就是说:“你成为低劣者,你成为殊胜者,你成为短命者,你成为长寿者……你成为劣慧者,你成为聪慧者。”像这样区分低劣与殊胜,并不是别的什么人做的,而是业本身就这样把众生区分开来。那个年轻人没能明白所说的含义,就像有人用厚布带把他的嘴绑住,却把甘美的食物放在他面前一样。据说他依仗慢心,自以为是智者,看不到有跟自己相等的人。为了摧破他这种慢心——“沙门乔达摩在说什么?他说的,正好是我知道的”——世尊心想:“我从一开始就把话说得难以理解,这样他就会来求我:‘乔达摩尊者,我不明白,请您详细地给我讲清楚。’到那时我再给他讲,这样对他才有利益。”于是世尊就把话说得难以理解。巴利
Tattha kammaṃ etesaṃ sakaṃ attano bhaṇḍakanti kammassakā. Kammassa dāyādāti kammadāyādā, kammaṃ etesaṃ dāyajjaṃ bhaṇḍakanti attho. Kammaṃ etesaṃ yoni kāraṇanti kammayonī. Kammaṃ etesaṃ bandhūti kammabandhū, kammañātakāti attho. Kammaṃ etesaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ patiṭṭhāti kammapaṭisaraṇā. Yadidaṃhīnappaṇītatāyāti yaṃ idaṃ ‘‘tvaṃ hīno bhava, tvaṃ paṇīto, tvaṃ appāyuko, tvaṃ dīghāyuko…pe… tvaṃ duppañño bhava, tvaṃ paññavā’’ti evaṃ hīnappaṇītatāya vibhajanaṃ, taṃ na añño koci karoti, kammameva evaṃ satte vibhajatīti attho. Na māṇavo kathitassa atthaṃ sañjānāsi, ghanadussapaṭṭenassa mukhaṃ bandhitvā madhuraṃ purato ṭhapitaṃ viya ahosi. Mānanissito kiresa paṇḍitamānī, attanā samaṃ na passati. Athassa ‘‘kiṃ samaṇo gotamo katheti, yamahaṃ jānāmi, tadeva kathetīti ayaṃ māno mā ahosī’’ti mānabhañjanatthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘āditova duppaṭivijjhaṃ katvā kathessāmi, tato ‘nāhaṃ bho gotama jānāmi, vitthārena me pākaṭaṃ katvā kathethā’ti maṃ yācissati, athassāhaṃ yācitakāle kathessāmi, evañcassa sātthakaṃ bhavissatī’’ti duppaṭivijjhaṃ katvā kathesi.
这时,他为了表明自己还没有通达,就说:“我确实不明白……”等等。巴利
Idāni so attano appaṭividdhabhāvaṃ pakāsento na kho ahantiādimāha.
290 “具足”是指圆满。“受持”是指被执取、被把持。年轻人,凡是杀生,这条道就是导向短命的道。意思是:这杀生的业,这条道就是导向短命的道。巴利
290.Samattenāti paripuṇṇena. Samādinnenāti gahitena parāmaṭṭhena. Appāyukasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ pāṇātipātīti yaṃ idaṃ pāṇātipātakammaṃ, esā appāyukasaṃvattanikā paṭipadāti.
那么,这个业是怎么造成短命的呢?业有四种:压迫业、断灭业、令生业、支持业。对于由强力业所生的果报,在它成熟运作的过程中,压迫业到来后,实际上是这样说的:“如果我能更早知道,就不会让你在这里结生,我会让你只投生到四恶趣中去。算了,不管你投生到哪里,我这所谓的压迫业都会压迫你,让你变得没有营养、没有滋味、枯涩。”从那时起,它就把那个生命弄成那样。它怎么做呢?它招来危难,摧毁财富。巴利
Kathaṃ panesā appāyukataṃ karoti? Cattāri hi kammāni upapīḷakaṃ upacchedakaṃ janakaṃ upatthambhakanti. Balavakammena hi nibbattaṃ pavatte upapīḷakaṃ āgantvā atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘sacāhaṃ paṭhamataraṃ jāneyyaṃ, na te idha nibbattituṃ dadeyyaṃ, catūsuyeva taṃ apāyesu nibbattāpeyyaṃ. Hotu, tvaṃ yattha katthaci nibbatta, ahaṃ upapīḷakakammaṃ nāma taṃ pīḷetvā nirojaṃ niyūsaṃ kasaṭaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Tato paṭṭhāya taṃ tādisaṃ karoti. Kiṃ karoti? Parissayaṃ upaneti, bhoge vināseti.
在这里,从男孩在母胎中受孕的那一刻起,母亲就没有什么愉悦或安乐,父母只有苦恼产生。它就是这样带来危难。而从男孩在母胎中受孕的那一刻起,家中的财富就像盐遇水一样,因为国王等人的缘故而消散;产奶的母牛不再出奶;原本温顺的牛变得凶暴,有的瞎眼,有的驼背;牛群中爆发疫病;奴仆等人不再听话;播下的种子不发芽;放在家里的财物在家里丢失,放在林野的财物在林野丢失;渐渐地,连草和遮身的衣物都变得难以得到;胎儿得不到照料;分娩时母亲的乳汁断绝;男孩得不到养护,受着逼迫,变得没有营养、没有活力、干瘪枯涩。这就叫做压迫业。巴利
Tattha dārakassa mātukucchiyaṃ nibbattakālato paṭṭhāya mātu assādo vā sukhaṃ vā na hoti, mātāpitūnaṃ pīḷāva uppajjati. Evaṃ parissayaṃ upaneti. Dārakassa pana mātukucchimhi nibbattakālato paṭṭhāya gehe bhogā udakaṃ patvā loṇaṃ viya rājādīnaṃ vasena nassanti, kumbhadohanadhenuyo khīraṃ na denti, sūratā goṇā caṇḍā honti, kāṇā honti, khujjā honti, gomaṇḍale rogo patati, dāsādayo vacanaṃ na karonti, vāpitaṃ sassaṃ na jāyati, gehagataṃ gehe, araññagataṃ araññe nassati, anupubbena ghāsacchādanamattaṃ dullabhaṃ hoti, gabbhaparihāro na hoti, vijātakāle mātuthaññaṃ chijjati, dārako parihāraṃ alabhanto pīḷito nirojo niyūso kasaṭo hoti, idaṃ upapīḷakakammaṃ nāma.
由长寿业所生起的(生命),当断灭业到来时,就会切断他的寿命。就像一个人射出一支能飞八乌萨巴远的箭,另一个人在箭刚从弓上离开的瞬间,就用木槌把它打落,让箭就地掉落;同样地,由长寿业所生起的(生命),断灭业会切断其寿命。它怎么做呢?它把他引入盗贼出没的森林,让他进入有猛兽和鳄鱼的地方,或者把他带到其他某种有危险的地方,这就叫断灭业,也叫“毁坏业”。巴利
Dīghāyukakammena pana nibbattassa upacchedakakammaṃ āgantvā āyuṃ chindati. Yathā hi puriso aṭṭhusabhagamanaṃ katvā saraṃ khipeyya tamañño dhanuto vimuttamattaṃ muggarena paharitvā tattheva pāteyya, evaṃ dīghāyukakammena nibbattassa upacchedakakammaṃ āyuṃ chindati. Kiṃ karoti? Corānaṃ aṭaviṃ paveseti, vāḷamacchodakaṃ otāreti, aññataraṃ vā pana saparissayaṭṭhānaṃ upaneti, idaṃ upacchedakakammaṃ nāma, ‘‘upaghātaka’’ntipi etasseva nāmaṃ.
能引生结生的业,叫做令生业。对于投生在贫穷家族等环境中的人,通过促成财富等圆满来给予支持,这就叫做支持业。巴利
Paṭisandhinibbattakaṃ pana kammaṃ janakakammaṃ nāma. Appabhogakulādīsu nibbattassa bhogasampadādikaraṇena upatthambhakakammaṃ upatthambhakakammaṃ nāma.
在这四种业里,前两种完全是不善业。令生业可以是善的,也可以是不善的;支持业则只能是善的。其中,杀生这种业因为能截断(他人的寿命),所以会带来短命的果报。而且,杀生者所造的善业不会变得广大,没有能力引生长寿的结生。这样一来,杀生就成了导致短命的原因。或者,它在结生的那一刻就决定下来,使(众生)变得短命;或者因为最终造作时的思心所,而投生到地狱;或者因为之前和之后的思心所,按照前面所说的方式,而变得短命。巴利
Imesu catūsu purimāni dve akusalāneva, janakaṃ kusalampi akusalampi, upatthambhakaṃ kusalameva. Tattha pāṇātipātakammaṃ upacchedakakammena appāyukasaṃvattanikaṃ hoti. Pāṇātipātinā vā kataṃ kusalakammaṃ uḷāraṃ na hoti, dīghāyukapaṭisandhiṃ janetuṃ na sakkoti. Evaṃ pāṇātipāto appāyukasaṃvattaniko hoti. Paṭisandhimeva vā niyāmetvā appāyukaṃ karoti, sanniṭṭhānacetanāya vā niraye nibbattati, pubbāparacetanāhi vuttanayena appāyuko hoti.
青年,这条行道能导向长寿。在这里,即使一个人是由微小的业所投生、在生命相续之中,当这个不杀生的离业加入进来时,从意义上它就是这样说的:“如果我事先知道,我就不会让你投生到这里,我会让你只投生到天界去。算了,不管你投生到哪里,我都会为你做一种叫‘支持业’的支撑。”于是它给予支持。它怎么做呢?它消除危险,带来财富。巴利
Dīghāyukasaṃvattanikā esā māṇava paṭipadāti ettha parittakammenapi nibbattaṃ pavatte etaṃ pāṇātipātā viratikammaṃ āgantvā atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘sacāhaṃ paṭhamataraṃ jāneyyaṃ, na te idha nibbattituṃ dadeyyaṃ, devalokeyeva taṃ nibbattāpeyyaṃ. Hotu, tvaṃ yattha katthaci nibbatti, ahaṃ upatthambhakakammaṃ nāma thambhaṃ te karissāmī’’ti upatthambhaṃ karoti. Kiṃ karoti? Parissayaṃ nāseti, bhoge uppādeti.
在这件事上,从孩子在母胎中受孕的那一刻开始,父母就只有安乐和舒适。那些本来会由人、非人所造成的种种危险,全都消失。这就是消除危险。而从孩子在母胎中受孕的那一刻开始,家里的财富多到无法计量,宝藏罐子从屋前屋后滚着涌进家中。父母甚至对别人寄存的财物,也能当面获得。母牛产奶很多,公牛性情温顺,播种的地方庄稼长得很好。无论是与生息有关的财物,还是暂时借出的财物,不用催讨,欠债者就自己携来归还;奴仆等人容易受教,各项工作也不衰退。孩子从入胎开始就得到保护,儿科医生也早已准备好。如果生在居士家,就得到长者之位;如果生在大臣等家,就得到将军等职位。财富就是这样产生。他没有危险,拥有财富,而且活得长久。如此,不杀生之业就成为能导向长寿的业。巴利
Tattha dārakassa mātukucchiyaṃ nibbattakālato paṭṭhāya mātāpitūnaṃ sukhameva sātameva hoti. Yepi pakatiyā manussāmanussaparissayā honti, te sabbe apagacchanti. Evaṃ parissayaṃ nāseti. Dārakassa pana mātukucchimhi nibbattakālato paṭṭhāya gehe bhogānaṃ pamāṇaṃ na hoti, nidhikumbhiyo puratopi pacchatopi gehaṃ pavaṭṭamānā pavisanti. Mātāpitaro parehi ṭhapitadhanassāpi sammukhībhāvaṃ gacchanti. Dhenuyo bahukhīrā honti, goṇā sukhasīlā honti, vappaṭṭhāne sassāni sampajjanti. Vaḍḍhiyā vā sampayuttaṃ, tāvakālikaṃ vā dinnaṃ dhanaṃ acoditā sayameva āharitvā denti, dāsādayo suvacā honti, kammantā na parihāyanti. Dārako gabbhato paṭṭhāya parihāraṃ labhati, komārikavejjā sannihitāva honti. Gahapatikule jāto seṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, amaccakulādīsu jāto senāpatiṭṭhānādīni labhati. Evaṃ bhoge uppādeti. So aparissayo sabhogo ciraṃ jīvatīti. Evaṃ apāṇātipātakammaṃ dīghāyukasaṃvattanikaṃ hoti.
不杀生的人所做的其他善业也会变得殊胜广大,能够引生长寿的结生,这样也就成为导向长寿的业。或者,它直接决定结生,使生命长寿。或者,通过决断思投生到天界,再以前思和后思,按照前面所说的方式而成为长寿。依照这一方法,在解答一切问题时都应如此理解。巴利
Apāṇātipātinā vā kataṃ aññampi kusalaṃ uḷāraṃ hoti, dīghāyukapaṭisandhiṃ janetuṃ sakkoti, evampi dīghāyukasaṃvattanikaṃ hoti. Paṭisandhimeva vā niyāmetvā dīghāyukaṃ karoti. Sanniṭṭhānacetanāya vā devaloke nibbattati, pubbāparacetanāhi vuttanayena dīghāyuko hoti. Iminā nayena sabbapañhavissajjanesu attho veditabbo.
损害之类的业在生命相续中生起时,从意义上说也像是在讲同样的事:它们通过压迫,使人陷入无福受用、得不到照顾的境地,从而引发疾病等;或者,因为损害等行为所做的善业不够广大;或者,从一开始就由结生决定;又或者,像前面说的那样,借着前思与后思的力量,造成多病等。反之,就像不杀生一样,不损害等行为则带来少病等。巴利
Viheṭhanakammādīnipi hi pavatte āgantvā atthato tatheva vadamānāni viya upapīḷanena nibbhogataṃ āpādetvā paṭijagganaṃ alabhantassa roguppādanādīhi vā, viheṭhakādīhi katassa kusalassa anuḷāratāya vā, āditova paṭisandhiniyāmanena vā, vuttanayeneva pubbāparacetanāvasena vā bahvābādhatādīni karonti, apāṇātipāto viya ca aviheṭhanādīnipi appābādhatādīnīti.
293 293. 在这里,“有嫉妒心的人”是指心与嫉妒相应。“被恼害”是指由于嫉妒而责骂、伤害他人。“系缚嫉妒”是指:就像捆扎大麦束那样,为了不让它消失而把它绑起来放着。“少随从者”是指随从很少的人;这种人就像夜里被扔出去的箭,完全看不见;又像捧着残食坐在那里,连给他递水的人都没有。巴利
293. Ettha pana issāmanakoti issāsampayuttacitto. Upadussatīti issāvaseneva upakkosanto dussati. Issaṃ bandhatīti yavakalāpaṃ bandhanto viya yathā na nassati evaṃ bandhitvā viya ṭhapeti. Appesakkhoti appaparivāro, rattiṃ khitto viya saro na paññāyati, ucchiṭṭhahattho nisīditvā udakadāyakampi na labhati.
294 不布施的人:因为悭吝,所以不布施。以那个业:以那个悭吝的业。巴利
294.Nadātā hotīti macchariyavasena na dātā hoti. Tena kammenāti tena macchariyakammena.
295 应敬礼:值得敬礼的佛陀、独觉佛或圣弟子。应起迎等也是如此。不过,在解答这个问题时,不应涉及压制业和支持业。因为在生命延续期间,无法把出身卑贱的人或出身高贵的人变成出身卑贱者或出身高贵者;只有在结生时就已经确定:出身卑贱的业使人投生在卑贱家族,出身高贵的业使人投生在高贵家族。巴利
295.Abhivādetabbanti abhivādanārahaṃ buddhaṃ vā paccekabuddhaṃ vā ariyasāvakaṃ vā. Paccuṭṭhātabbādīsupi eseva nayo. Imasmiṃ pana pañhavissajjane upapīḷakaupatthambhakakammāni na gahetabbāni. Na hi pavatte nīcakulinaṃ vā uccākulinaṃ vā sakkā kātuṃ, paṭisandhimeva pana niyāmetvā nīcakuliyaṃ kammaṃ nīcakule nibbatteti, uccākuliyaṃ kammaṃ uccākule.
296 “不询问”在这里并不是说,仅仅因为不询问就会投生到地狱。而是说,不询问的人不知道“这件事该做,这件事不该做”;因为不知道,该做的他不做,不该做的反而去做。这样一来,他就投生到地狱,而另一种人则投生到天界。就是这样,青年……中略……也就是低劣与殊胜的差别。导师顺着法流把开示引到了这里。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
296.Na paripucchitā hotīti ettha pana aparipucchanena niraye na nibbattati. Aparipucchako pana ‘‘idaṃ kātabbaṃ, idaṃ na kātabba’’nti na jānāti, ajānanto kātabbaṃ na karoti, akātabbaṃ karoti. Tena niraye nibbattati, itaro sagge. Iti kho, māṇava…pe… yadidaṃ hīnappaṇītatāyāti satthā desanaṃ yathānusandhiṃ pāpesi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
6. 大业分别经的注释巴利
6. Mahākammavibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
298 “如是我闻”这句,说的就是《大业分别经》。其中“空无”是指空虚、没有结果。“真实”是指确实如此、如实不虚。而这个说法并不是他亲耳从世尊面前听来的。不过在《优波离经》(《中部》第56经)里,世尊确实说过:“对于恶业的造作、恶业的持续运转,我说意业过失更重,身业不是这样,语业也不是这样。”这番话在各位外道游方者中间传开了,他就抓住这一点来说。至于“而有这些定境”这句,是针对《波塔巴达经》(《长部》第9经)等中出现的关于“想受灭是怎样的”这一讨论——也就是灭尽定——而说的。“什么都感受不到”是指连一种感受都没有。“然而,确实是有……”这是长老针对灭尽定而表示认可。“应当守护”是指通过避免被人指责来守护。“有思”是指其中有思,意思是造作了带有意图、带有思的业。“是苦”这句,是长老心里认定“这个游方者问的只是不善法”,所以才这样说。巴利
298.Evaṃme sutanti mahākammavibhaṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha moghanti tucchaṃ aphalaṃ. Saccanti tathaṃ bhūtaṃ. Idañca etena na sammukhā sutaṃ, upālisutte (ma. ni. 2.56) pana – ‘‘manokammaṃ mahāsāvajjataraṃ paññapemi pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya pāpassa kammassa pavattiyā, no tathā kāyakammaṃ no tathā vacīkamma’’nti bhagavatā vuttaṃ atthi, sā kathā titthiyānaṃ antare pākaṭā jātā, taṃ gahetvā esa vadati. Atthi ca sā samāpattīti idaṃ – ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho, bho, abhisaññānirodho hotī’’ti poṭṭhapādasutte (dī. ni. 1.406 ādayo) uppannaṃ abhisaññānirodhakathaṃ sandhāya vadati. Na kiñci vediyatīti ekavedanampi na vediyati. Atthi ca khoti thero nirodhasamāpattiṃ sandhāya anujānāti. Parirakkhitabbanti garahato mocanena rakkhitabbaṃ. Sañcetanā assa atthīti sañcetanikaṃ, sābhisandhikaṃ sañcetanikakammaṃ katvāti attho. Dukkhaṃ soti thero ‘‘akusalameva sandhāya paribbājako pucchatī’’ti saññāya evaṃ vadati.
世尊确实连在四面全黑的暗处,也能用肉眼看见周围一由旬之内像芝麻那么微细的诸行。而这位游方者就住在不远处,距离只有大约一俱卢舍,世尊为什么还那样说呢?这是就彼此相见时的“看见”而说的。巴利
Dassanampi kho ahanti bhagavā caturaṅgepi andhakāre samantā yojanaṭṭhāne tilamattampi saṅkhāraṃ maṃsacakkhunāva passati, ayañca paribbājako na dūre gāvutamattabbhantare vasati, kasmā bhagavā evamāhāti? Samāgamadassanaṃ sandhāyevamāha.
299 伍达义,即喇伦达义。所谓“那在苦中”,意思是那一切都只是苦。他这样针对轮回之苦、烦恼之苦、行苦,问道:“假如世尊说过……”巴利
299.Udāyīti lāludāyī. Taṃ dukkhasminti sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhameva. Iti imaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ kilesadukkhaṃ saṅkhāradukkhaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sace bhāsitaṃ bhaveyya bhagavā’’ti pucchati.
300 “浮现”是指问题的浮现。“正在浮现”是指正在把头伸出来。“将会以不恰当的方式浮现”是指将以不恰当的方式把头伸出来。而世尊知道这件事,并不是靠天眼,也不是靠他心智或一切知智,而是凭着他的意向就知道了。因为正在说话的人,他的意向确实很容易看出来:想说话时,他会抬起脖子,摇动下巴,嘴唇颤动,坐也坐不住。世尊看到他这个样子,一观察就知道了:“这位伍达义坐不住,他一定会说出那件不实的事。”“一开始”就是指在开头那里。“三种受”——提问者先确定“我问的是三种受”,这样确定之后才问“他感受什么?”这三种受。“能带来乐受的”是指能作为乐受之缘的。其余两项也依此类推。巴利
300.Ummaṅganti pañhāummaṅgaṃ. Ummujjamānoti sīsaṃ nīharamāno. Ayoniso ummujjissatīti anupāyena sīsaṃ nīharissati. Idañca pana bhagavā jānanto neva dibbacakkhunā na cetopariyañāṇena na sabbaññutañāṇena jāni, adhippāyeneva pana aññāsi. Kathentassa hi adhippāyo nāma suvijāno hoti, kathetukāmo gīvaṃ paggaṇhāti, hanukaṃ cāleti, mukhamassa phandati, sannisīdituṃ na sakkoti. Bhagavā tassa taṃ ākāraṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ udāyī sannisīdituṃ na sakkoti, yaṃ abhūtaṃ, tadeva kathessatī’’ti oloketvāva aññāsi. Ādiṃ yevātiādimhiyeva. Tisso vedanāti ‘‘kiṃ so vediyatī’’ti? Pucchantena ‘‘tisso vedanā pucchāmī’’ti evaṃ vavatthapetvāva tisso vedanā pucchitā. Sukhavedaniyanti sukhavedanāya paccayabhūtaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
在这里,从欲界善心中伴随喜的心的四种思,以及下三禅的思,因为在结生和转起时都能产生乐受,所以叫做能带来乐受的业。其中,欲界的业在结生时只产生乐,而在转起时,于可爱或中舍的所缘,也会产生不苦不乐受。巴利
Ettha ca kāmāvacarakusalato somanassasahagatacittasampayuttā catasso cetanā, heṭṭhā tikajjhānacetanāti evaṃ paṭisandhipavattesu sukhavedanāya jananato sukhavedaniyaṃ kammaṃ nāma. Kāmāvacarañcettha paṭisandhiyaṃyeva ekantena sukhaṃ janeti, pavatte iṭṭhamajjhattārammaṇe adukkhamasukhampi.
不善思在结生和转起时都只产生苦,所以叫能带来苦受的业。这种业只有在身门转起时才纯粹只产生苦,在其他情况下也会产生不苦不乐受。不过,那种受因为仅仅是在不可爱及不可爱中性的所缘上生起的,所以在归类上只算作苦。巴利
Akusalacetanā paṭisandhipavattesu dukkhasseva jananato dukkhavedaniyaṃ kammaṃ nāma. Kāyadvāre pavatteyeva cetaṃ ekantena dukkhaṃ janeti, aññattha adukkhamasukhampi, sā pana vedanā aniṭṭhāniṭṭhamajjhattesuyeva ārammaṇesu uppajjanato dukkhātveva saṅkhaṃ gatā.
从欲界善业来说,与舍受相应的心所俱的四种思,以及从色界善业来说的第四禅那的思,这样,因为它们在结生和转起中能产生第三种受,所以称为能带来不苦不乐受的业。在这里,欲界的业在结生时只产生不苦不乐受,而在转起中,遇到可爱所缘时也会产生乐受。另外,能带来乐受的业依结生和转起而运作,能带来不苦不乐受的业也是这样,而能带来苦受的业只在转起时运作。然而,按照另一种说法,一切业都只在转起时运作。巴利
Kāmāvacarakusalato pana upekkhāsahagatacittasampayuttā catasso cetanā, rūpāvacarakusalato catutthajjhānacetanāti evaṃ paṭisandhipavattesu tatiyavedanāya jananato adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṃ kammaṃ nāma. Ettha ca kāmāvacaraṃ paṭisandhiyaṃyeva ekantena adukkhamasukhaṃ janeti, pavatte iṭṭhārammaṇe sukhampi. Apica sukhavedaniyakammaṃ paṭisandhipavattivasena vaṭṭati, tathā adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṃ, dukkhavedaniyaṃ pavattivaseneva vaṭṭati. Etassa pana vasena sabbaṃ pavattivaseneva vaṭṭati.
长老说“于此,世尊”这句话,是为了请求如来讲述大业分别而先显示出自己的意向。他心里想:“我应当先请求如来,然后让大业分别智在比丘僧团中清楚显现。”因为他善于衔接前后文,所以才这样说。其中,“大业分别”就是对大业的分别。“哪四种……阿难,在这里,有某类人……投生到地狱”,这一段并不是对大业分别智的详细分析,而是为了说明大业分别智而安立的论母。巴利
Etassa bhagavāti thero tathāgatena mahākammavibhaṅgakathanatthaṃ ālayo dassito, tathāgataṃ yācitvā mahākammavibhaṅgañāṇaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa pākaṭaṃ karissāmīti cintetvā anusandhikusalatāya evamāha. Tattha mahākammavibhaṅganti mahākammavibhajanaṃ. Katame cattāro…pe… idhānanda, ekacco puggalo…pe… nirayaṃ upapajjatīti idaṃ na mahākammavibhaṅgañāṇabhājanaṃ, mahākammavibhaṅgañāṇabhājanatthāya pana mātikāṭṭhapanaṃ.
301 阿难,这里“某位沙门或婆罗门”是一段独立的连结。世尊是为了说明“具天眼的沙门婆罗门,以此作为所缘,获得此条件,而执持这种见”才开始说的。其中,“热忱”等五个词,都是精进的名称。“心定”,指天眼定。“看见”,是指他观察“那个有情投生到哪里”时看见了。“那些以其他方式”,是指那些认为“因为圆满了十善业道,所以投生地狱”的人,说他们的智是邪谬的。按这种方式,所有段落的意思都应这样理解。“知道”,就是明了。“以强力”,就是以见的强力。“以执取”,就是以见的执取。“执取后断言”,是指决定、执取之后而这样说。巴利
301.Idhānanda, ekacco samaṇo vāti pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Idañhi bhagavā – ‘‘dibbacakkhukā samaṇabrāhmaṇā idaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā imaṃ paccayaṃ labhitvā idaṃ dassanaṃ gaṇhantī’’ti pakāsanatthaṃ ārabhi. Tattha ātappantiādīni pañcapi vīriyasseva nāmāni. Cetosamādhinti dibbacakkhusamādhiṃ. Passatīti ‘‘so satto kuhiṃ nibbatto’’ti olokento passati. Ye aññathāti ye ‘‘dasannaṃ kusalānaṃ kammapathānaṃ pūritattā nirayaṃ upapajjatī’’ti jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇanti vadati. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Viditanti pākaṭaṃ. Thāmasāti diṭṭhithāmena. Parāmāsāti diṭṭhiparāmāsena. Abhinivissa voharatīti adhiṭṭhahitvā ādiyitvā voharati.
302 在这里,“阿难”这一句也不是对大业分别智的详细分别,而只是它的论母安立。不过,这里显示了这些具天眼者的说法中,哪些被认可,哪些不被认可。其中,“在那里”指在那四位沙门婆罗门之中。“这是他的”指这是他的说法。“以其他方式”指以其他方式。如此,在这四位沙门婆罗门的议论中,有两种情况被认可,有三种情况不被认可,应当这样了知一切处的认可与不认可。巴利
302.Tatrānandāti idampi na mahākammavibhaṅgañāṇassa bhājanaṃ, atha khvāssa mātikāṭṭhapanameva. Ettha pana etesaṃ dibbacakkhukānaṃ vacane ettakā anuññātā, ettakā ananuññātāti idaṃ dassitaṃ. Tattha tatrāti tesu catūsu samaṇabrāhmaṇesu. Idamassāti idaṃ vacanaṃ assa. Aññathāti aññenākārena. Iti imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ vāde dvīsu ṭhānesu anuññātā, tīsu ananuññātāti evaṃ sabbattha anuññā nānuññā veditabbā.
303 303. 如此,说明了对于具天眼者的说法哪些是认可的、哪些是不认可的之后,如今在阐述大业分别智时,便说道:“阿难,在那里,这位补特伽罗……”等等。巴利
303. Evaṃ dibbacakkhukānaṃ vacane anuññā ca ananuññā ca dassetvā idāni mahākammavibhaṅgañāṇaṃ vibhajanto tatrānanda, yvāyaṃ puggalotiādimāha.
“先前他所造作的”:这是说,这位有天眼的人看见他正在造业,而在这之前他已经造过的业,就是“先前所造作的”。因为依靠先前所造的业可以投生到地狱,依靠后来所造的业也可以投生到地狱;或者有人在临终时,由于“塞犍陀是最殊胜的、湿婆是最殊胜的、祖父是最殊胜的,世界是由自在天等创造的”这类邪见,也同样会投生到地狱。“于现法”:在这里,如果某种业是现法受业,那就在今生受报;如果是次生受业,那就投生后来受报;如果是后后受业,那就在之后的轮回转世中感受果报。巴利
Pubbe vāssa taṃ kataṃ hotīti yaṃ iminā dibbacakkhukena kammaṃ karonto diṭṭho, tato pubbe kataṃ. Pubbe katenapi hi niraye nibbattati, pacchā katenapi nibbattati, maraṇakāle vā pana – ‘‘khando seṭṭho sivo seṭṭho, pitāmaho seṭṭho, issarādīhi vā loko visaṭṭho’’tiādinā micchādassanenapi nibbattateva. Diṭṭheva dhammeti yaṃ tattha diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ hoti, tassa diṭṭheva dhamme, yaṃ upapajjavedanīyaṃ, tassa upapajjitvā, yaṃ aparāpariyavedanīyaṃ, tassa aparasmiṃ pariyāye vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti.
这样,这位沙门或婆罗门只见到了一类业和一类果报,而正自觉者却见到了他没有见到的三类业和两类果报。通过这一点,正自觉者见到了已见的和未见的,共四类业和三[类]果报。了知这七种情况的智慧,就叫作如来[的]大业分别智。在第二段说明中,天眼没有见到什么,但如来见到了三类业和两类果报。了知这五种各自亲证的情况的智慧,也叫作如来[的]大业分别智。其余两段说明也是同样的道理。巴利
Iti ayaṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ekaṃ kammarāsiṃ ekañca vipākarāsiṃ addasa, sammāsambuddho iminā adiṭṭhe tayo kammarāsī, dve ca vipākarāsī addasa. Iminā pana diṭṭhe adiṭṭhe ca cattāro kammarāsī tayo ca vipākarāsī addasa. Imāni satta ṭhānāni jānanañāṇaṃ tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅgañāṇaṃ nāma. Dutiyavāre dibbacakkhukena kiñci na diṭṭhaṃ , tathāgatena pana tayo kammarāsī, dve ca vipākarāsī diṭṭhāti. Imānipi pañca paccattaṭṭhānāni jānanañāṇaṃ tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅgañāṇaṃ nāma. Sesavāradvayepi eseva nayo.
“不可能”指的是缺乏真实性的不善业。“看似不可能”是说:它显现为不可能,也就是被压伏、被排挤。当大量不善业已经积聚时,强势的业会排挤弱势业的果报,为自己的果报腾出位置,这就是“不可能且看似不可能”。但如果已经积聚了善业,临终时又造了不善业,这个不善业会排挤善业的果报,为自己的果报腾出位置,这就是“不可能却看似可能”。即使积聚了大量善业,强势的业也会排挤弱势业的果报,为自己的果报腾出位置,这就是“可能且看似可能”。但如果已经积聚了不善业,临终时又造了善业,这个善业会排挤不善业的果报,为自己的果报腾出位置,这就是“可能却看似不可能”。巴利
Abhabbanti bhūtavirahitaṃ akusalaṃ. Abhabbābhāsanti abhabbaṃ ābhāsati abhibhavati paṭibāhatīti attho. Bahukasmiñhi akusalakamme āyūhite balavakammaṃ dubbalakammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ karoti idaṃ abhabbañceva abhabbābhāsañca. Kusalaṃ pana āyūhitvā āsanne akusalaṃ kataṃ hoti, taṃ kusalassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ karoti, idaṃ abhabbaṃ bhabbābhāsaṃ. Bahumhi kusale āyūhitepi balavakammaṃ dubbalakammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ karoti, idaṃ bhabbañceva bhabbābhāsañca. Akusalaṃ pana āyūhitvā āsanne kusalaṃ kataṃ hoti, taṃ akusalassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ karoti, idaṃ bhabbaṃ abhabbābhāsaṃ.
另外,这里也应通过呈现的方式来理解其含义。这里所说的其实是:以不可能而显现、呈现出来,因此叫“看似不可能”。其中,按照“世间有这样一种人,是杀生者……”这样的方式,讲到了四种人。在这四种人当中,第一种人的业是“不可能”且“看似不可能”的。因为那是不善的,所以是不可能;又因为他投生到地狱,所以它以能导致投生地狱的不善业的方式呈现出来。第二种人的业是“不可能”而“看似可能”的。因为那是不善的,所以是不可能;但他投生到天界,所以它以能导致外道投生天界的善业的方式呈现出来。另外两种业也应同样理解。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
Apica upaṭṭhānākārenapettha attho veditabbo. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti, abhabbato ābhāsati upaṭṭhātīti abhabbābhāsaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yvāyaṃ puggalo idha pāṇātipātī’’tiādinā nayena cattāro puggalā vuttā, tesu paṭhamassa kammaṃ abhabbaṃ abhabbābhāsaṃ, tañhi akusalattā abhabbaṃ, tassa ca niraye nibbattattā tattha nibbattikāraṇabhūtaṃ akusalaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Dutiyassa kammaṃ abhabbaṃ bhabbābhāsaṃ, tañhi akusalattā abhabbaṃ. Tassa pana sagge nibbattattā aññatitthiyānaṃ sagge nibbattikāraṇabhūtaṃ kusalaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Itarasmimpi kammadvaye eseva nayo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《六处分别经》的注释巴利
7. Saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
304 “我这样听闻”——这就是《六处分别经》。其中,“应当了知”是指应当以与观智同起的道来了知。“意思索”就是寻与伺。因为在这里,能生起寻的那个意,被特别称为“意”;意的伺察活动,就叫作“意思索”。“有情立足处”是指依赖轮回与还灭的众生的立足处。因为在这里,有十八种轮回的立足处,十八种还灭的立足处,而这些也应当以与观智同起的道来了知。“调御师”是指训练象等行为规矩的教导者,意思是那些应受调伏者的调伏者。其余内容将在分别部分中阐明。这就是“总纲”,也就是论母的安立。巴利
304.Evaṃme sutanti saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha veditabbānīti sahavipassanena maggena jānitabbāni. Manopavicārāti vitakkavicārā. Vitakkuppādakañhi mano idha manoti adhippetaṃ, manassa upavicārāti manopavicārā. Sattapadāti vaṭṭavivaṭṭanissitānaṃ sattānaṃ padā. Ettha hi aṭṭhārasa vaṭṭapadā nāma, aṭṭhārasa vivaṭṭapadā nāma, tepi sahavipassanena maggeneva veditabbā. Yoggācariyānanti hatthiyoggādiācārasikkhāpakānaṃ, dametabbadamakānanti attho. Sesaṃ vibhaṅgeyeva āvibhavissati. Ayamuddesoti idaṃ mātikāṭṭhapanaṃ.
305 眼处等这些内容,在《清净道论》里已经详细讲过了。“眼识”是指由善和不善的果报所生的两种眼识。其余那些依止于净色根的识,道理也是这样。不过,除了这十种之外,剩下的在这里就叫做“意识”。巴利
305.Cakkhāyatanādīni visuddhimagge vitthāritāni. Cakkhuviññāṇanti kusalākusalavipākato dve cakkhuviññāṇāni. Sesapasādaviññāṇesupi eseva nayo. Imāni pana dasa ṭhapetvā sesaṃ idha manoviññāṇaṃ nāma.
眼触,就是在眼根那里的触。这是与眼识相应的触的称谓。其余诸处也是如此。巴利
Cakkhusamphassoti cakkhumhi samphasso. Cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttasamphassassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
“以眼见色”,就是以眼识见色。这个解释方式在所有地方都一样。“能生喜悦之处”,是指作为喜悦的所缘而成为原因。“随伺察”,是指以伺的运作在那里随同伺察,而与它相应的寻也是如此——按这个道理,应当知道有十八种被称为寻伺的意随寻。这里说的“六种喜悦随寻”,是指与喜悦一起随同伺察,所以叫喜悦随寻。剩下两句也是同样的道理。巴利
Cakkhunārūpaṃ disvāti cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ disvā. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Somanassaṭṭhāniyanti somanassassa ārammaṇavasena kāraṇabhūtaṃ. Upavicaratīti tattha vicārapavattanena upavicarati, vitakko taṃsampayutto cāti iminā nayena aṭṭhārasa vitakkavicārasaṅkhātā manopavicārā veditabbā. Cha somanassūpavicārāti ettha pana somanassena saddhiṃ upavicarantīti somanassūpavicārā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
306 “依靠在家生活的”:指依靠五种欲乐。“依靠出离的”:指依靠观智。“可爱的”:指所追求、寻觅的。“可意的”:指所渴望的。“令心愉悦的”:因为心在这些事物上感到欢喜,所以叫“令心愉悦的”,即那些令心愉悦的事物。“与世间染着相连的”:指与渴爱相连。“过去的”:指已经得到过的。有人会问:对现在的事物,喜悦生起还说得通,对过去的,喜悦怎么能生起呢?回答:对过去的事物,当人回忆“就像我现在享受可爱的所缘一样,过去我也曾这样享受过”时,强烈的喜悦就会生起。巴利
306.Gehasitānīti kāmaguṇanissitāni. Nekkhammasitānīti vipassanānissitāni. Iṭṭhānanti pariyesitānaṃ. Kantānanti kāmitānaṃ. Manoramānanti mano etesu ramatīti manoramāni, tesaṃ manoramānaṃ. Lokāmisapaṭisaṃyuttānanti taṇhāpaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ. Atītanti paṭiladdhaṃ . Paccuppannaṃ tāva ārabbha somanassaṃ uppajjatu, atīte kathaṃ uppajjatīti. Atītepi – ‘‘yathāhaṃ etarahi iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ anubhavāmi, evaṃ pubbepi anubhavi’’nti anussarantassa balavasomanassaṃ uppajjati.
“无常”是指无常的特征。“变坏、离贪、灭尽”是指:因为舍弃了本来的状态,所以是变坏;因为消逝,所以是离贪;因为彻底止息,所以是灭尽。“以正慧”是指以观慧。这被称为“基于出离的喜悦”:就像一位国王看着自己的荣华富贵,而修行者建立起观智后坐着,当看到诸行的坏灭时,锐利而猛利的观智在诸行所摄的范围内运转,此时生起的喜悦,就称为“基于出离的喜悦”。这也是曾经说过的——巴利
Aniccatanti aniccākāraṃ. Vipariṇāmavirāganirodhanti pakativijahanena vipariṇāmaṃ, vigacchanena virāgaṃ, nirujjhanena nirodhaṃ. Sammapaññāyāti vipassanāpaññāya. Idaṃ vuccati nekkhammasitaṃ somanassanti idaṃ rañño viya attano sirisampattiṃ olokentassa vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nisinnassa saṅkhārānaṃ bhedaṃ passato saṅkhāragatamhi tikkhe sūre vipassanāñāṇe vahante uppannasomanassaṃ ‘‘nekkhammasitaṃ somanassa’’nti vuccati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 进入空寂之处、内心寂静的比丘,
正确观照法时,会生起一种非人间的喜乐。
随所观照诸蕴之生灭,
彼即获得喜与欢欣;于明了者,此即不死。”巴利
‘‘Suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno; Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato. Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amatantaṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 373-374);
这些:是指坐着修观的人,于可爱的所缘在六门中出现时,以无常等角度建立起观之后,所生起的六种依出离的喜悦。巴利
Imānīti imāni chasu dvāresu iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate aniccādivasena vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nisinnassa uppannāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni.
307 对于“过去”:先说现在,希求却得不到时,忧会生起;那么在过去,忧又怎么会生起呢?在过去,当他这样回忆:“就像我现在希求可爱的对象却得不到,过去我也曾希求却同样没有得到”,由此便会生起强烈的忧。巴利
307.Atītanti paccuppannaṃ tāva patthetvā alabhantassa domanassaṃ uppajjatu, atīte kathaṃ uppajjatīti. Atītepi ‘‘yathāhaṃ etarahi iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ patthetvā na labhāmi, evaṃ pubbepi patthetvā na labhi’’nti anussarantassa balavadomanassaṃ uppajjati.
在“无与伦比的解脱”中,所谓“无与伦比的解脱”就是指阿拉汉果;“把希求安立在阿拉汉果上”就是这个意思。“处”指阿拉汉果这个处所。“令希求现起”是指让希求生起。而这种忧是在生起这种希求时出现的,因为是以希求为根本,所以经文说“令希求现起”。这六种依出离的忧应当这样理解:当可爱的所缘在六门中现前时,他把希求安立在阿拉汉果上,为了证得它,以无常等方式建立起观,却无法努力精进,于是悲伤地想:“这半个月、这个月,乃至这一年,都没能证得阿拉汉果。”就像住在村边山窟的玛哈斯瓦长老那样,泪水不断流下而生起的忧,应当知道这就是六种依出离的忧。至于事缘,在《善吉祥光》即《长部》注的《帝释问经》注释中有详细说明,想要了解的人可以从那里获取。巴利
Anuttaresu vimokkhesūti anuttaravimokkho nāma arahattaṃ, arahatte patthanaṃ paṭṭhapentassāti attho. Āyatananti arahattāyatanaṃ. Pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayatoti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapentassa. Taṃ panetaṃ patthanaṃ paṭṭhapentassa uppajjati, iti patthanāmūlakattā ‘‘pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato’’ti vuttaṃ. Imāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassānīti imāni evaṃ chasu dvāresu iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate arahatte pihaṃ paṭṭhapetvā tadadhigamāya aniccādivasena vipassanaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā ussukkāpetuṃ asakkontassa – ‘‘imampi pakkhaṃ imampi māsaṃ imampi saṃvaccharaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ nāsakkhi’’nti anusocato gāmantapabbhāravāsimahāsīvattherassa viya assudhārāpavattanavasena uppannadomanassāni cha nekkhammasitadomanassānīti veditabbāni. Vatthu pana sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya sakkapañhavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.361) vitthāritaṃ, icchantena tato gahetabbaṃ.
308 “生起舍”:这里的“舍”是指无智舍。“非分断者”:因为漏尽者已经断除烦恼的界限而安住,所以称为“分断者”,因此“非分断者”就是指非漏尽者。“非果报断者”:同样地,因为漏尽者已经断除未来的果报而安住,所以只有漏尽者才是“果报断者”,因此“非果报断者”也是指非漏尽者。“不见过患者”:指不从过患和灾祸的角度去观察的人。这六种依俗家的舍:当可爱的所缘在六门中出现时,所生起的舍就像藏在糖团里的苍蝇一样,不能超越色等所缘,只是黏着、迷恋于其中;这样的舍,应当知道就是这六种依俗家的舍。巴利
308.Uppajjati upekkhāti ettha upekkhā nāma aññāṇupekhā. Anodhijinassāti kilesodhiṃ jinitvā ṭhitattā khīṇāsavo odhijino nāma, tasmā akhīṇāsavassāti attho. Avipākajinassāti etthapi āyatiṃ vipākaṃ jinitvā ṭhitattā khīṇāsavova vipākajino nāma, tasmā akhīṇāsavassevāti attho. Anādīnavadassāvinotiādīnavato upaddavato apassantassa. Imā cha gehasitā upekkhāti imā evaṃ chasu dvāresu iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate guḷapiṇḍake nilīnamakkhikā viya rūpādīni anativattamānā tattha laggā laggitā hutvā uppannā upekkhā cha gehasitā upekkhāti veditabbā.
它超越了色,所以不越过色,不会因为贪爱而停留在那里。这六种依出离的舍:当可爱等所缘出现在六门时,对可爱的所缘不贪染,对不可爱的所缘不瞋恼,于平等观察时不迷乱,与已生起的观智相应的六种依出离的舍,应当知道就是这些。巴利
Rūpaṃ sā ativattatīti rūpaṃ sā anatikkamati, tattha nikantivasena na tiṭṭhati. Imā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhāti imā evaṃ chasu dvāresu iṭṭhādiārammaṇe āpāthagate iṭṭhe arajjantassa, aniṭṭhe adussantassa, asamapekkhane asammuyhantassa, uppannavipassanā-ñāṇasampayuttā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhāti veditabbā.
309 在这里,“依靠这个,舍弃那个”的意思是:在那三十六种情况中,依靠十八种,舍弃另外十八种。正因如此,世尊才说:“比丘们,在这里,有六种出离的……”等等。“依靠、凭借”是指以生起的方式依靠和凭借。这样,它们的超越就得以实现:也就是说,通过出离的法的生起,俗家的法就被超越了。巴利
309.Tatra idaṃ nissāya idaṃ pajahathāti tesu chattiṃsasattapadesu aṭṭhārasa nissāya aṭṭhārasa pajahathāti attho. Teneva – ‘‘tatra, bhikkhave, yāni cha nekkhammasitānī’’tiādimāha. Nissāya āgammāti pavattanavasena nissāya ceva āgamma ca. Evametesaṃ samatikkamohotīti evaṃ nekkhammasitānaṃ pavattanena gehasitāni atikkantāni nāma honti.
就这样,先用同类对同类的方式舍掉之后,现在要说明以强舍弱,于是说道:“比丘们,对此,有六种依出离的喜悦……”等等。这样一来,通过依出离的喜悦来舍断依出离的忧,又通过依出离的舍来舍断依出离的喜悦,就说明了以强舍弱的舍断方式。巴利
Evaṃ sarikkhakeneva sarikkhakaṃ jahāpetvā idāni balavatā dubbalaṃ jahāpento – ‘‘tatra, bhikkhave, yāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassānī’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ nekkhammasitasomanassehi nekkhammasitadomanassāni , nekkhammasitaupekkhāhi ca nekkhammasitasomanassāni jahāpentena balavatā dubbalappahānaṃ kathitaṃ.
在这里,应当先站在这个立场上来理解关于“舍”的说明:在八种等至中,前三禅——也就是初禅等——以及以纯粹行作为基础而开始修观的四位比丘,他们观之前的前分观,可能是与喜相应的,也可能是与舍相应的;但出起观则一定与喜相应。以第四禅等作为基础而开始修观的五位比丘,他们的前分观和前面一样;但出起观则是与舍相应的。针对这一点,世尊才说:“你们应当依靠、依止那六种依出离的舍,舍弃那六种依出离的喜。”而且,对这样修行的比丘来说,这种受的差别不只出现在观的过程中,在圣道中,禅支、觉支、道支也有差别。巴利
Ettha pana ṭhatvā upekkhākathā veditabbā – aṭṭhasu hi samāpattīsu paṭhamādīni ca tīṇi jhānāni, suddhasaṅkhāre ca pādake katvā vipassanaṃ āraddhānaṃ catunnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatā vā hoti upekkhāsahagatā vā, vuṭṭhānagāminī pana somanassasahagatāva. Catutthajjhānādīni pādakāni katvā vipassanaṃ āraddhānaṃ pañcannaṃ pubbabhāgavipassanā purimasadisāva. Vuṭṭhānagāminī pana upekkhāsahagatā hoti. Idaṃ sandhāya – ‘‘yā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā, tā nissāya tā āgamma, yāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni, tāni pajahathā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na kevalañca evaṃpaṭipannassa bhikkhuno ayaṃ vipassanāya vedanāvisesova hoti, ariyamaggepi pana jhānaṅgabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgānampi viseso hoti.
那么,是谁决定了这种差别呢?有些长老说,是作为观之基础的禅那决定的;有些长老说,是作为观所缘的诸蕴决定的;有些长老说,是个人的意乐决定的。对这些人所说的观点,也应当知道:其实是前分阶段的出起观在决定。而关于这个问题的详细抉择,在《清净道论》讲解“行舍”的地方已经说过了。巴利
Ko panetaṃ visesaṃ niyameti? Keci tāva therā vipassanāpādakajjhānaṃ niyametīti vadanti, keci vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā niyamentīti vadanti, keci puggalajjhāsayo niyametīti vadanti. Tesampi vāde ayameva pubbabhāge vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanā niyametīti veditabbā. Vinicchayakathā panettha visuddhimagge saṅkhārupekkhāniddese vuttāva.
310 “种种”是指多种多样、许许多多、各式各样。“依种种”是指依靠种种不同的所缘。“单一”是指一种。“依单一”是指依靠单一的所缘。那么,这里说的舍是什么呢?前面已经讲了无智舍,后面将会讲六支舍,而这里则包含了止舍和观舍这两种舍。巴利
310.Nānattāti nānā bahū anekappakārā. Nānattasitāti nānārammaṇanissitā. Ekattāti ekā. Ekattasitāti ekārammaṇanissitā. Katamā panāyaṃ upekkhāti? Heṭṭhā tāva aññāṇupekkhā vuttā, upari chaḷaṅgupekkhā vakkhati, idha samathaupekkhā, vipassanupekkhāti dve upekkhā gahitā.
在这里,对色的舍是一种,对声等的舍又是另一种,因为对色的舍并不会出现在对声等的情况里。对色的舍只以诸色为所缘,不以声等为所缘。而且,同是对色的舍,有一种止的舍是取地遍为所缘而生起,另一种则是取水遍等为所缘而生起。所以,在分析“多样性”和“依多样性”时,世尊说:“诸比丘,有对诸色的舍……”等等。然而,因为空无边处没有两种、三种之分,识无边处等也没有,所以在分析“单一性”和“依单一性”时,世尊说:“诸比丘,有依止于空无边处的舍……”等等。巴利
Tattha yasmā aññāva rūpesu upekkhā, aññāva saddādīsu, na hi yā rūpe upekkhā, sā saddādīsu hoti. Rūpe upekkhā ca rūpameva ārammaṇaṃ karoti , na saddādayo. Rūpe upekkhābhāvañca aññā samathaupekkhā pathavīkasiṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjati, aññā āpokasiṇādīni. Tasmā nānattaṃ nānattasitaṃ vibhajanto atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhā rūpesūtiādimāha . Yasmā pana dve vā tīṇi vā ākāsānañcāyatanāni vā viññāṇañcāyatanādīni vā natthi, tasmā ekattaṃ ekattasitaṃ vibhajanto atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhā ākāsānañcāyatananissitātiādimāha.
其中,与空无边处相应的舍,因为与它相应,所以是依止于空无边处的;而观照空无边处诸蕴的人的观舍,因为以它为所缘,所以也是依止于空无边处的。其余几处也是这样。巴利
Tattha ākāsānañcāyatanaupekkhā sampayuttavasena ākāsānañcāyatananissitā, ākāsānañcāyatanakhandhe vipassantassa vipassanupekkhā ārammaṇavasena ākāsānañcāyatananissitā. Sesāsupi eseva nayo.
在这里,“舍弃那个”是指:用无色界的定舍来舍掉色界的定舍,用无色界的观舍来舍掉色界的观舍。巴利
Taṃ pajahathāti ettha arūpāvacarasamāpattiupekkhāya rūpāvacarasamāpattiupekkhaṃ pajahāpeti, arūpāvacaravipassanupekkhāya rūpāvacaravipassanupekkhaṃ.
在这里,“不热衷”是指:“热衷”就是渴爱,因为彻底断尽了它,所以出起观被称为“不热衷”。“舍弃彼”在这里是指:通过出起观,让人舍弃无色界的定舍和观舍。巴利
Atammayatanti ettha tammayatā nāma taṇhā, tassā pariyādānato vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanā atammayatāti vuccati. Taṃ pajahathāti idha vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanāya arūpāvacarasamāpattiupekkhañca vipassanupekkhañca pajahāpeti.
311 “Yadariyo”是指圣者、正自觉者所亲近(修习)的那些念处。这里应当知道:在三种情形中安立念,就是在亲近念处。不想听闻,是指虽然有了信心,却不想去听。不想了知,是指不为了知道而把心提起来。回避,是指越过、避开。对导师的教法,是指不认为应当接受、应当圆满实行导师的教诫,这就是这里的意思。不欢喜,是指没有自己的意乐。这里也不应当理解为由于依止世俗而产生的忧恼所以不高兴,而是说在那些还没有修行的人身上,没有产生欢喜的因由,才这样说。无漏,是指没有嗔之漏。具念正知,是指具足念与智。具舍,是指以六恒住舍而具舍。欢喜,这里也不应当理解为由于依止世俗而产生的喜所以浮动,而是说在那些已经修行的人身上,没有产生不欢喜的因由,才这样说。无漏,是指没有贪之漏。巴利
311.Yadariyoti ye satipaṭṭhāne ariyo sammāsambuddho sevati. Tattha tīsu ṭhānesu satiṃ paṭṭhapento satipaṭṭhāne sevatīti veditabbo. Na sussūsantīti saddahitvā sotuṃ na icchanti. Na aññāti jānanatthāya cittaṃ na upaṭṭhapenti. Vokkammāti atikkamitvā. Satthu sāsanāti satthu ovādaṃ gahetabbaṃ pūretabbaṃ na maññantīti attho. Na ca attamanoti na sakamano. Ettha ca gehasitadomanassavasena appatīto hotīti na evamattho daṭṭhabbo, appaṭipannakesu pana attamanatākāraṇassa abhāvenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Anavassutoti paṭighaavassavena anavassuto. Sato sampajānoti satiyā ca ñāṇena ca samannāgato . Upekkhakoti chaḷaṅgupekkhāya upekkhako. Attamanoti idhāpi gehasitasomanassavasena uppilāvitoti na evamattho daṭṭhabbo, paṭipannakesu pana anattamanatākāraṇassa abhāvenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Anavassutoti rāgāvassavena anavassuto.
312 已调御:就是已被调伏。只朝一个方向跑:是说奔跑时不回头,就只朝一个方向跑;但如果回过头来,就能再朝另一个方向跑。向八方奔驰:是指以盘腿坐姿坐定,身体不动,凭解脱之力,一下子便向八个方向奔行;或者面朝东坐,或面朝南等其他某个方向坐定后,进入八种禅定——这就是它的意思。其余各处文义都清楚。巴利
312.Sāritoti damito. Ekameva disaṃ dhāvatīti anivattitvā dhāvanto ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvati, nivattitvā pana aparaṃ dhāvituṃ sakkoti. Aṭṭhadisā vidhāvatīti ekapallaṅkena nisinno kāyena anivattitvāva vimokkhavasena ekappahāreneva aṭṭha disā vidhāvati, puratthābhimukho vā dakkhiṇādīsu aññataradisābhimukho vā nisīditvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo samāpajjatiyevāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《略说分别经》的注释巴利
8. Uddesavibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
313 如是我闻这句,就是《略说分别经》。其中,“略说分别”是指略说和分别,也就是论母和详细分析的意思。“应当审察”是指衡量、审查、把握、判定。“在外”是指在外的所缘上。“不散乱、不逸散”:因为贪爱而停留在所缘上,就叫作散乱、逸散;为了否定这一点,才这样说。“内不停滞”是指在自身内在的行境中,不因为贪爱而停滞。“无所执取而不战栗”是指:不执取、不抓取,那个识就不会战栗。整句的意思是:识对外不散乱、不逸散,对内不停滞,无所执取而不战栗,比丘就应当这样去审察。“生老死苦的集起”是指:生、老、死以及其余一切苦都不再生起,这就是这句话的含义。巴利
313.Evaṃme sutanti uddesavibhaṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha uddesavibhaṅganti uddesañca vibhaṅgañca, mātikañca vibhajanañcāti attho. Upaparikkheyyāti tuleyya tīreyya pariggaṇheyya paricchindeyya. Bahiddhāti bahiddhāārammaṇesu. Avikkhittaṃ avisaṭanti nikantivasena ārammaṇe tiṭṭhamānaṃ vikkhittaṃ visaṭaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ paṭisedhento evamāha. Ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitanti gocarajjhatte nikantivasena asaṇṭhitaṃ. Anupādāya na paritasseyyāti anupādiyitvā aggahetvā taṃ viññāṇaṃ na paritasseyya. Yathā viññāṇaṃ bahiddhā avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya, evaṃ bhikkhu upaparikkheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavoti jātijarāmaraṇassa ceva avasesassa ca dukkhassa nibbatti na hotīti attho.
316 随色相者:就是随念色相、追随色相,所以叫随色相者。巴利
316.Rūpanimittānusārīti rūpanimittaṃ anussarati anudhāvatīti rūpanimittānusārī.
318 贤友,像这样,“内不滞”是指因不贪爱而不滞。以不贪爱而不滞故,不会成为退步分,而只会成为胜进分。巴利
318.Evaṃ kho, āvuso, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitanti nikantivasena asaṇṭhitaṃ. Nikantivasena hi atiṭṭhamānaṃ hānabhāgiyaṃ na hoti, visesabhāgiyameva hoti.
320 320.“无取着而发颤”:导师在《蕴品》里说:“比丘们,我要为你们讲说取着而发颤,以及无取着而发颤。”(《相应部》3.7)像这样,把取着说为发颤,把不取着说为不发颤。大长老却把取着而发颤本身当作无取着而发颤来展示,所以才这样说。那么,这怎么会成为无取着而发颤呢?因为根本没有可被取着的东西。如果真有某种行法,可以已执取为常、恒、是我、是我所,那么这种发颤就确实是取着而发颤。然而,正因为根本不存在这样可被执取的行法,所以即使以“色是我”等方式把色等诸蕴执取起来,实际上也等同于没有执取。因此应当知道,这种发颤从见解的角度看虽然是取着而发颤,但从实质意义上说,它就叫作无取着而发颤。巴利
320.Anupādā paritassanāti satthārā khandhiyavagge ‘‘upādāparitassanañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi anupādāaparitassanañcā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.7) evaṃ gahetvā paritassanā, aggahetvāva aparitassanā ca kathitā, taṃ mahāthero upādāparitassanameva anupādāparitassananti katvā dassento evamāha. Kathaṃ panesā anupādāparitassanā hotīti. Upādātabbassa abhāvato. Yadi hi koci saṅkhāro nicco vā dhuvo vā attā vā attaniyo vāti gahetabbayuttako abhavissa, ayaṃ paritassanā upādāparitassanāva assa. Yasmā pana evaṃ upādātabbo saṅkhāro nāma natthi, tasmā rūpaṃ attātiādinā nayena rūpādayo upādinnāpi anupādinnāva honti. Evamesā diṭṭhivasena upādāparitassanāpi samānā atthato anupādāparitassanāyeva nāma hotīti veditabbā.
“成为别异”是指转变,因为舍弃了原本的状态而消失。“随色变异而转”是指:以“我的色变异了”或者“曾经有的,如今对我来说确实没有了”这类方式,业识随着色的坏灭而转起。“由变异随转所生”是指从随变异而转、以变异为所缘的心识所生起。“怖畏、法集起”是指渴爱的怖畏和不善法的集起。“遍取心而住立”是指将善心遍取、执持、耗尽,而后住立。“有怖畏”是指因恐惧而有怖畏,也因渴爱而有怖畏。“有恼患”是指有恼患、有痛。“有顾恋者”是指有执着、有贪爱。如是,贤友,所谓“无执取而怖畏”是这样的:如同以宝盒想而拿起空宝盒,在那宝盒丢失之后陷入恼患的人那样,后来不执取而有怖畏。巴利
Aññathā hotīti parivattati pakatijahanena nassati, rūpavipariṇāmānuparivattīti ‘‘mama rūpaṃ vipariṇata’’nti vā, ‘‘yaṃ ahu, taṃ vata me natthī’’ti vā ādinā (ma. ni. 1.242) nayena kammaviññāṇaṃ rūpassa bhedānuparivatti hoti. Vipariṇāmānuparivattajāti vipariṇāmassa anuparivattanato vipariṇāmārammaṇacittato jātā. Paritassanā dhammasamuppādāti taṇhāparitassanā ca akusaladhammasamuppādā ca. Cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhantīti kusalacittaṃ pariyādiyitvā gahetvā khepetvā tiṭṭhanti. Uttāsavāti bhayatāsenapi sauttāso taṇhātāsenapi sauttāso. Vighātavāti savighāto sadukkho. Apekkhavāti sālayo sasineho. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, anupādā paritassanā hotīti evaṃ maṇikaraṇḍakasaññāya tucchakaraṇḍakaṃ gahetvā tasmiṃ naṭṭhe pacchā vighātaṃ āpajjantassa viya pacchā aggahetvā paritassanā hoti.
321 对于“不随色变异而转”这一句:漏尽者已经没有业识,所以不会随色的坏灭而转起。其余各处都浅显易懂。巴利
321.Naca rūpavipariṇāmānuparivattīti khīṇāsavassa kammaviññāṇameva natthi, tasmā rūpabhedānuparivatti na hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
9. 《无诤分别经》注释巴利
9. Araṇavibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
323 “如是我闻”这句,说的就是《无诤分别经》。其中,“不应抬高,不应贬低”:意思是基于世俗生活的立场,对任何一个人都不抬举,也不贬抑。“只应说法”:意思是只宣说事物的真实本性。“乐之决断”:意思是已经判定好的乐。“背后言说”:意思是在背后说别人的过失,也就是离间语。“当面不应说恶语”:意思是即使当面,也不说恶语、粗恶、染污的话。“不应执取”:意思是不固执地执取之后再说。“随顺名称”:意思是随顺世间的名称、世间施设。“不应超越”:意思是不应逾越。巴利
323.Evaṃme sutanti araṇavibhaṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha nevussādeyya na apasādeyyāti gehasitavasena kañci puggalaṃ neva ukkhipeyya na avakkhipeyya. Dhammameva deseyyāti sabhāvameva katheyya. Sukhavinicchayanti vinicchitasukhaṃ. Raho vādanti parammukhā avaṇṇaṃ, pisuṇavācanti attho. Sammukhā na khīṇanti sammukhāpi khīṇaṃ ākiṇṇaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ vācaṃ na bhaṇeyya. Nābhiniveseyyāti na adhiṭṭhahitvā ādāya vohareyya. Samaññanti lokasamaññaṃ lokapaṇṇattiṃ. Nātidhāveyyāti nātikkameyya.
324 以欲结生之乐为乐的人:就是依靠欲的结生、与欲相应的乐而快乐的人。有苦的人:就是因异熟之苦和杂染之苦而有苦的人。有伤害的人:就是因异熟之伤害和烦恼之伤害而有伤害的人。有热恼的人也是这样。邪行道:就是不正确的行道,也就是不善的行道。巴利
324.Kāmapaṭisandhisukhinoti kāmapaṭisandhinā kāmūpasaṃhitena sukhena sukhitassa. Sadukkhoti vipākadukkhena saṃkilesadukkhenapi sadukkho. Saupaghātoti vipākūpaghātakilesūpaghāteheva saupaghāto. Tathā sapariḷāho. Micchāpaṭipadāti ayāthāvapaṭipadā akusalapaṭipadā.
326 有些人贬低别人,是这样:以世俗执著贬低某些人。抬举也是同样的道理。有结,就是有的束缚,这是渴爱的名称。巴利
326.Ittheke apasādetīti evaṃ gehasitavasena ekacce puggale apasādeti. Ussādanepi eseva nayo. Bhavasaṃyojananti bhavabandhanaṃ, taṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ.
据说,须菩提长老就是依靠这四法而被立为第一的。世尊说法时,对人们的褒扬和贬抑是能看出来的,舍利弗长老等人也是如此。但须菩提长老说法时,不会说“这个人没有修行、没有成就”,也不会说“这个人具戒、有德、知耻、温和、行为圆满”;他说法时,只显示出“这是邪道,这是正道”。所以世尊说:“比丘们,在我的声闻比丘中,安住无诤第一的,就是须菩提。”巴利
Subhūtitthero kira imaṃ catukkaṃ nissāya etadagge ṭhapito. Bhagavato hi dhammaṃ desentassa puggalānaṃ ussādanāapasādanā paññāyanti, tathā sāriputtattherādīnaṃ. Subhūtittherassa pana dhammadesanāya ‘‘ayaṃ puggalo appaṭipannako anārādhako’’ti vā, ‘‘ayaṃ sīlavā guṇavā lajjipesalo ācārasampanno’’ti vā natthi, dhammadesanāya panassa ‘‘ayaṃ micchāpaṭipadā, ayaṃ sammāpaṭipadā’’tveva paññāyati. Tasmā bhagavā ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ araṇavihārīnaṃ yadidaṃ subhūtī’’ti āha.
329 对于“知时者”:时机还没到或者已经过去时,他不会开口,而是了知“现在说这个,大众会接受”这一合适时机之后,才在背后说别人的过失。即使是在当面说的情形,也是同样的道理。巴利
329.Kālaññūassāti asampatte ca atikkante ca kāle akathetvā ‘‘idāni vuccamānaṃ mahājano gaṇhissatī’’ti yuttapattakālaṃ ñatvāva parammukhā avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyya. Khīṇavādepi eseva nayo.
330 受损就是被破坏。声音也受损,就是声音也破裂。患病就是成为病人,生病、有疾。未开释就是没有开释、没有无碍。巴利
330.Upahaññatīti ghātiyati. Saropi upahaññatīti saddopi bhijjati. Āturīyatīti āturo hoti gelaññappatto sābādho. Avissaṭṭhanti vissaṭṭhaṃ apalibuddhaṃ na hoti.
331 所谓“即彼”,就是指那个器皿。固执地使用言语:到了以“钵”为称呼的地方,听到“把钵拿来,洗一洗”,却仍固执地说:“愚痴盲目的凡夫,这不是钵,此名为盘,你应该这样说。”所有词都可以这样套用。“超逾”就是过度奔跑。巴利
331.Tadevāti taṃyeva bhājanaṃ. Abhinivissa voharatīti pattanti sañjānanajanapadaṃ gantvā ‘‘pattaṃ āharatha dhovathā’’ti sutvā ‘‘andhabālaputhujjano, nayidaṃ pattaṃ, pāti namesā, evaṃ vadāhī’’ti abhinivissa voharati. Evaṃ sabbapadehi yojetabbaṃ. Atisāroti atidhāvanaṃ.
332 同样地,他到处这样说而不执取:在我们的家乡,器皿叫做“盘”,但这里的人把它叫做“钵”。从那时起,他放下家乡的说法,不执取地就说它是钵。其余的词也是这样理解。巴利
332.Tathā tathā voharati aparāmasanti amhākaṃ janapade bhājanaṃ pātīti vuccati, ime pana naṃ pattanti vadantīti tato paṭṭhāya janapadavohāraṃ muñcitvā pattaṃ pattanteva aparāmasanto voharati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
333 333. 现在,划定界限时,说了“于此,比丘们”等话。其中,“有染”是指有尘垢、有烦恼。“无染”是指无尘垢、无烦恼。而“须菩提,比丘们”这句,这位长老在这两处都被列为第一:“无诤住者中,即须菩提;应供者中,即须菩提。”(《增支部》1.202)巴利
333. Idāni mariyādabhājanīyaṃ karonto tatra, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha saraṇoti sarajo sakileso. Araṇoti arajo nikkileso. Subhūti ca pana, bhikkhaveti ayaṃ thero dvīsu ṭhānesu etadaggaṃ āruḷho ‘‘araṇavihārīnaṃ yadidaṃ subhūti, dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ yadidaṃ subhūtī’’ti (a. ni. 1.202).
据说,法将(舍利弗)负责净化施物,须菩提长老负责净化施主。为什么呢?法将出去托钵时,站在人家门口,在人们把食物拿来的那段时间里,他先划定一个时限,然后进入灭尽定;从灭尽定出来后,才接受施物。须菩提长老也同样进入慈心禅,从慈心禅出来后,才接受施物。那么,这样做得到吗?是的,做得到,而且这并不稀奇,因为证得大神通的声闻弟子确实能这样做。就在这铜掌岛,过去有位国王的时代,有一位名叫宾伽罗佛护的长老,依止北方村而住。那里有七百户人家,没有哪一家的门口是长老不曾入定的。其余各处文义都很容易理解。巴利
Dhammasenāpati kira vatthuṃ sodheti, subhūtitthero dakkhiṇaṃ sodheti. Tathā hi dhammasenāpati piṇḍāya caranto gehadvāre ṭhito yāva bhikkhaṃ āharanti, tāva pubbabhāge paricchinditvā nirodhaṃ samāpajjati, nirodhā vuṭṭhāya deyyadhammaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti. Subhūtitthero ca tatheva mettājhānaṃ samāpajjati, mettājhānā vuṭṭhāya deyyadhammaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti. Evaṃ pana kātuṃ sakkāti. Āma sakkā, neva acchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ mahābhiññappattā sāvakā evaṃ kareyyuṃ. Imasmimpi hi tambapaṇṇidīpe porāṇakarājakāle piṅgalabuddharakkhitatthero nāma uttaragāmaṃ nissāya vihāsi. Tattha satta kulasatāni honti, ekampi taṃ kuladvāraṃ natthi, yattha thero samāpattiṃ na samāpajji. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《界分别经》的注释(第10章)巴利
10. Dhātuvibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
342 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《界分别经》。其中“游行”是指匆匆赶路的行走。“跋伽婆,如果你不觉得沉重”,意思是:如果你没有什么负担或不适。“如果他允许”——据说跋伽婆心里这样想:“出家人各有各的喜好,有的人喜欢跟众人在一起,有的人喜欢独自待着。如果他是个喜欢独处的人,就会说:‘贤友,别进来,这间房我已经得到了。’如果这位是个喜欢独处的人,就会说:‘贤友,你出去吧,这间房我已经得到了。’这样一来,我就成了让两个人争吵的人。给出去的东西就是给出去了,做过的事就算做过了。”所以他这样说了。巴利
342.Evaṃme sutanti dhātuvibhaṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha cārikanti turitagamanacārikaṃ. Sace te bhaggava agarūti sace tuyhaṃ bhāriyaṃ aphāsukaṃ kiñci natthi. Sace so anujānātīti bhaggavassa kira etadahosi – ‘‘pabbajitā nāma nānāajjhāsayā, eko gaṇābhirato hoti, eko ekābhirato. Sace so ekābhirato bhavissati, ‘āvuso, mā pāvisi, mayā sālā laddhā’ti vakkhati. Sace ayaṃ ekābhirato bhavissati, ‘āvuso, nikkhama, mayā sālā laddhā’ti vakkhati. Evaṃ sante ahaṃ ubhinnaṃ vivādakāretā nāma bhavissāmi, dinnaṃ nāma dinnameva vaṭṭati, kataṃ katamevā’’ti. Tasmā evamāha.
良家子:既指出身于良家,也指行为端正的良家子。已前来安住:意思是已经来到这里住下。从哪里来?从得叉尸罗城来。巴利
Kulaputtoti jātikulaputtopi ācārakulaputtopi. Vāsūpagatoti vāsaṃ upagato. Kuto āgantvāti? Takkasīlanagarato.
这里的次第说法是这样:据说,当摩揭陀国的频婆娑罗王在中印度地区的王舍城治理国政时,边地的得叉尸罗城由布咕萨提王统治。那时,有些商人从得叉尸罗带着货物来到王舍城,备好礼品去觐见国王。国王见他们礼敬后站在一旁,便问:“你们住在哪里?”他们回答:“陛下,我们住在得叉尸罗。”于是国王问了那个地方是否安稳、收成好不好等情况,又问了城里的消息,然后问:“你们的国王叫什么名字?”他们回答:“陛下,叫布咕萨提。”国王又问:“他如法治理吗?”他们回答:“是的,陛下,他如法治理。他用四种摄事来摄受人民,像世间的父母一样对待大众,又像安抚躺在床上的婴儿一样让人民欢喜。”国王问:“他多大年纪?”他们便告诉了国王他的年纪。结果发现他和频婆娑罗王年纪相同。于是国王对他们说:“诸位贤友,你们的国王如法治理,年纪又和我一样,你们能不能设法让你们的国王和我成为朋友?”他们回答:“陛下,能。”国王便免除了他们的关税,还给他们安排了住处,并说:“你们去吧,卖完货物,临行前来见我一面再走。”他们照办了,临行时来见国王。国王说:“你们去吧,替我反复向你们的国王问候安康,并告诉他:‘国王希望和你结交为友。’”巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – majjhimappadese kira rājagahanagare bimbisāre rajjaṃ kārente paccante takkasīlanagare pukkusāti rājā rajjaṃ kāresi. Atha takkasīlato bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā vāṇijā rājagahaṃ āgatā paṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā rājānaṃ addasaṃsu. Rājā te vanditvā ṭhite ‘‘katthavāsino tumhe’’ti pucchi. Takkasīlavāsino devāti. Atha ne rājā janapadassa khemasubhikkhatādīni nagarassa ca pavattiṃ pucchitvā ‘‘ko nāma tumhākaṃ rājā’’ti pucchi. Pukkusāti nāma devāti. Dhammikoti? Āma deva dhammiko. Catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi janaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, lokassa mātāpitiṭṭhāne ṭhito, aṅge nipannadārakaṃ viya janaṃ tosetīti. Katarasmiṃ vaye vattatīti? Athassa vayaṃ ācikkhiṃsu. Vayesupi bimbisārena samavayo jāto. Atha te rājā āha – ‘‘tātā tumhākaṃ rājā dhammiko, vayena ca me samāno, sakkuṇeyyātha tumhākaṃ rājānaṃ mama mittaṃ kātu’’nti. Sakkoma devāti. Rājā tesaṃ suṅkaṃ vissajjetvā gehañca dāpetvā – ‘‘gacchatha bhaṇḍaṃ vikkiṇitvā gamanakāle maṃ disvā gaccheyyāthā’’ti āha. Te tathā katvā gamanakāle rājānaṃ addasaṃsu. ‘‘Gacchatha tumhākaṃ rājānaṃ mama vacanena punappunaṃ ārogyaṃ pucchitvā ‘rājā tumhehi saddhiṃ mittabhāvaṃ icchatī’ti vadathā’’ti āha.
他们答应说“萨度”,回去把货物收拾好,吃过早饭,就去见国王,向国王行礼。国王问:“喂,这几天你们去哪儿了,怎么都见不到你们?”他们把整件事的经过都报告了。国王很高兴,说:“很好,贤友们,靠你们帮忙,我在中印度交到了一位国王朋友。”后来,王舍城的商人也去了得叉尸罗。他们带着礼物来见布咕萨提王时,国王问:“你们从哪里来?”听说“从王舍城来”之后,他说:“你们是从我朋友的城市来的。”
“是的,陛下。”他问了朋友的安康,然后击鼓宣告:“从今天起,凡是从我朋友的城市来的商人,不管是步行商队还是车乘商队,只要一进入我的国土,就要给他们安排住处,从王库供给食物,免除关税,不许对他们有任何侵扰。”频婆娑罗王也在自己的城里照样击鼓宣告了同样的命令。巴利
Te sādhūti paṭissuṇitvā gantvā bhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā bhuttapātarāsā rājānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vandiṃsu. Rājā ‘‘kahaṃ bhaṇe tumhe ettake ime divase na dissathā’’ti pucchi. Te sabbaṃ pavattiṃ ārocesuṃ. Rājā – ‘‘sādhu, tātā, tumhe nissāya mayā majjhimappadese rājā mitto laddho’’ti attamano ahosi. Aparabhāge rājagahavāsinopi vāṇijā takkasīlaṃ agamaṃsu. Te paṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā āgate pukkusāti rājā ‘‘kuto āgatatthā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘rājagahato’’ti sutvā ‘‘mayhaṃ sahāyassa nagarato āgatā tumhe’’ti. Āma devāti. Ārogyaṃ me sahāyassāti ārogyaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘ajja paṭṭhāya ye mayhaṃ sahāyassa nagarato jaṅghasatthena vā sakaṭasatthena vā vāṇijā āgacchanti, sabbesaṃ mama visayaṃ paviṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya vasanagehāni, rājakoṭṭhāgārato nivāpañca dentu, suṅkaṃ vissajjentu, kiñci upaddavaṃ mā karontū’’ti bheriṃ carāpesi. Bimbisāropi attano nagare tatheva bheriṃ carāpesi.
于是频婆娑罗王派人送了一封信给布咕萨提:“边远地区往往出产宝珠之类的珍宝。要是我朋友的国家里出现了什么好看或好听的宝物,希望我朋友别对我吝啬。”布咕萨提也回了一封信:“中印度可是个大地方,要是那里出现了这样的宝物,也请我朋友别对我吝啬。”就这样日子一天天过去,两人虽然从未见过面,却成了感情深厚的好朋友。巴利
Atha bimbisāro pukkusātissa paṇṇaṃ pahiṇi – ‘‘paccantadese nāma maṇimuttādīni ratanāni uppajjanti, yaṃ mayhaṃ sahāyassa rajje dassanīyaṃ vā savanīyaṃ vā ratanaṃ uppajjati, tattha me mā maccharāyatū’’ti. Pukkusātipi – ‘‘majjhimadeso nāma mahājanapado, yaṃ tattha evarūpaṃ ratanaṃ uppajjati, tattha me sahāyo mā maccharāyatū’’ti paṭipaṇṇaṃ pahiṇi. Evaṃ te gacchante gacchante kāle aññamaññaṃ adisvāpi daḷhamittā ahesuṃ.
他们这样互相约定后,住着的期间,布咕萨提先得到了一份礼物。据说,那位国王得到了八块五彩斑斓、价值连城的毛毯。他心想:“这些毛毯实在太漂亮了,我要送给我的朋友。”于是他让人做了八个像虫漆丸那么大的精致小盒,把毛毯装进盒里,再用虫漆滚成圆球,用白布裹好,装进匣子,外面再用布包上,盖上王印,派大臣送去,吩咐道:“把这个交给我朋友。”还交代说:“这份礼物要在城中央,让大臣们围着观看。”他们到了之后,就把礼物交给了频婆娑罗。巴利
Evaṃ tesaṃ katikaṃ katvā vasantānaṃ paṭhamataraṃ pukkusātissa paṇṇākāro uppajji. Rājā kira aṭṭha pañcavaṇṇe anagghakambale labhi. So – ‘‘atisundarā ime kambalā, ahaṃ sahāyassa pesissāmī’’ti lākhāguḷamatte aṭṭha sārakaraṇḍake likhāpetvā tesu te kambale pakkhipitvā lākhāya vaṭṭāpetvā setavatthena veṭhetvā samugge pakkhipitvā vatthena veṭhetvā rājamuddikāya lañchetvā ‘‘mayhaṃ sahāyassa dethā’’ti amacce pesesi. Sāsanañca adāsi – ‘‘ayaṃ paṇṇākāro nagaramajjhe amaccādiparivutena daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Te gantvā bimbisārassa adaṃsu.
他听完传话后,就让人击鼓在城中宣告:“大臣们,都来集合!”然后他坐在城中央,被大臣等人围绕,头顶撑着白伞,坐在最上等的宝座上。他打开印封,拿掉布,打开匣子,解开里面的包裹,看见虫漆丸后,心想:“我的朋友布咕萨提大概以为‘我的朋友家财丰厚’,才送来这份礼物吧。”他拿起一粒丸子,在手里搓了搓,一掂就知道里面有布包。于是他用宝座脚一撞,虫漆立刻碎开。他用指甲打开小盒,看见里面有一条宝毯,又让人把其余的都打开,结果全都是毯子。然后他让人把毯子铺开,这些毯子色彩具足、触感美妙,长十六肘,宽八肘。大众看见后弹指赞叹,挥动衣巾,满心欢喜地说:“我们国王这位从未谋面的朋友布咕萨提,连面都没见过就送来这样的礼物,结交这样的朋友,真是应该!”国王让人逐一估价这些毯子,结果每一块都是无价之宝。他把其中四条送去供养正自觉者,四条留在自己宫里。接着他心想:“以后送礼的人,应该送比第一次礼物更好的东西才对。我的朋友送来了无价之宝,我该送什么回礼呢?”巴利
So sāsanaṃ sutvā amaccādayo sannipatantūti bheriṃ carāpetvā nagaramajjhe amaccādiparivuto setacchattena dhāriyamānena pallaṅkavare nisinno lañchanaṃ bhinditvā vatthaṃ apanetvā samuggaṃ vivaritvā anto bhaṇḍikaṃ muñcitvā lākhāguḷe disvā ‘‘mayhaṃ sahāyo pukkusāti ‘jutavittako me sahāyo’ti maññamāno maññe imaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pahiṇī’’ti ekaṃ guḷaṃ gahetvā hatthena vaṭṭetvā tulayantova anto dussabhaṇḍikaṃ atthīti aññāsi. Atha naṃ pallaṅkapāde paharitvā tāvadeva lākhā paripati, so nakhena karaṇḍakaṃ vivaritvā anto kambalaratanaṃ disvā itarepi vivarāpesi, sabbepi kambalā ahesuṃ. Atha ne pattharāpesi, te vaṇṇasampannā phassasampannā dīghato soḷasahatthā tiriyaṃ aṭṭhahatthā ahesuṃ. Mahājano disvā aṅguliyo poṭhesi, celukkhepaṃ akāsi, – ‘‘amhākaṃ rañño adiṭṭhasahāyo pukkusāti adisvāva evarūpaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pesesi, yuttaṃ evarūpaṃ mittaṃ kātu’’nti attamano ahosi. Rājā ekamekaṃ kambalaṃ agghāpesi, sabbe anagghā ahesuṃ. Tesu cattāro sammāsambuddhassa pesesi, cattāro attano ghare akāsi. Tato cintesi – ‘‘pacchā pesentena paṭhamaṃ pesitapaṇṇākārato atirekaṃ pesetuṃ vaṭṭati, sahāyena ca me anaggho paṇṇākāro pesito, kiṃ nu kho pesemī’’ti?
难道王舍城里就没有比那更珍贵的宝物吗?不是没有,这位国王确实福报很大。不过,自从他证得入流果那时候起,除了三宝之外,再没有别的宝物能让他心生欢喜了。于是他就开始琢磨什么是宝物。宝物有两种:有情的宝物和无情的宝物。其中,无情的宝物就是金、银之类的东西,有情的宝物则是指具有根身的众生。无情的宝物只是给人做装饰等用途而已。所以在这两种宝物当中,有情的宝物更殊胜。有情的宝物又分两种:畜生宝和人宝。其中,畜生宝就是象宝、马宝,它们也是为了让人类受用才出现的。所以在这两种当中,人宝更殊胜。人宝又分两种:女宝和男宝。其中,转轮王所拥有的女宝,也是为男子所受用的。所以在这两种当中,男宝更殊胜。巴利
Kiṃ pana rājagahe tato adhikaṃ ratanaṃ natthīti? No natthi, mahāpuñño rājā, apica kho panassa sotāpannakālato paṭṭhāya ṭhapetvā tīṇi ratanāni aññaṃ ratanaṃ somanassaṃ janetuṃ samatthaṃ nāma natthi . So ratanaṃ vicinituṃ āraddho – ratanaṃ nāma saviññāṇakaṃ aviññāṇakanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha aviññāṇakaṃ suvaṇṇarajatādi, saviññāṇakaṃ indriyabaddhaṃ. Aviññāṇakaṃ saviññāṇakasseva alaṅkārādivasena paribhogaṃ hoti, iti imesu dvīsu ratanesu saviññāṇakaṃ seṭṭhaṃ. Saviññāṇakampi duvidhaṃ tiracchānaratanaṃ manussaratananti. Tattha tiracchānaratanaṃ hatthiassaratanaṃ, tampi manussānaṃ upabhogatthameva nibbattati , iti imesupi dvīsu manussaratanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ. Manussaratanampi duvidhaṃ itthiratanaṃ purisaratananti. Tattha cakkavattino rañño uppannaṃ itthiratanampi purisasseva upabhogaṃ. Iti imesupi dvīsu purisaratanameva seṭṭhaṃ.
男宝也分两种:在家宝和出家宝。其中,就算是在家宝里的转轮王,今天也要用五体投地的方式,礼敬刚刚出家的沙弥。所以在这两种当中,出家宝才是最殊胜的。出家宝也分两种:有学宝和无学宝。其中,哪怕有十万个有学,也比不上一个无学的一分。所以在这两种当中,无学宝才是最殊胜的。无学宝也分两种:佛宝和声闻宝。其中,哪怕有十万个声闻宝,也比不上一个佛宝的一分。所以在这两种当中,佛宝才是最殊胜的。巴利
Purisaratanampi duvidhaṃ agāriyaratanaṃ anagāriyaratanañca. Tattha agāriyaratanesupi cakkavattirājā ajja pabbajitasāmaṇeraṃ pañcapatiṭṭhitena vandati, iti imesupi dvīsu anagāriyaratanameva seṭṭhaṃ. Anagāriyaratanampi duvidhaṃ sekkharatanañca asekkharatanañca. Tattha satasahassampi sekkhānaṃ asekkhassa padesaṃ na pāpuṇāti, iti imesupi dvīsu asekkharatanameva seṭṭhaṃ. Tampi duvidhaṃ buddharatanaṃ sāvakaratananti. Tattha satasahassampi sāvakaratanānaṃ buddharatanassa padesaṃ na pāpuṇāti, iti imesupi dvīsū buddharatanameva seṭṭhaṃ.
佛宝也分两种:独觉佛宝和一切知佛宝。在这两种当中,即使有十万位独觉佛,也达不到一位一切知佛的一分。所以,在这两种里面,一切知佛宝才是最殊胜的。因为在这个包括天神在内的世间,没有任何宝物能和佛宝相比。于是他想:我要把这无与伦比的宝物送给我那位朋友。他问得叉尸罗的居民们:孩子们,在你们那个地方,能见到佛、法、僧这三宝吗?那里连这样的音声都还没有,更别说亲眼见到了。巴利
Buddharatanampi duvidhaṃ paccekabuddharatanaṃ sabbaññubuddharatananti. Tattha satasahassampi paccekabuddhānaṃ sabbaññubuddhassa padesaṃ na pāpuṇāti, iti imesupi dvīsu sabbaññubuddharatanaṃyeva seṭṭhaṃ. Sadevakasmiñhi loke buddharatanasamaṃ ratanaṃ nāma natthi. Tasmā asadisameva ratanaṃ mayhaṃ sahāyassa pesessāmīti cintetvā takkasīlavāsino pucchi – ‘‘tātā tumhākaṃ janapade buddho dhammo saṅghoti imāni tīṇi ratanāni dissantī’’ti. Ghosopi so mahārāja tāva tattha natthi, dassanaṃ pana kutoti.
“真好啊,孩子们!”国王满心欢喜,想道:“为了摄受大众,能不能把正自觉者派到我朋友住的地方去呢?可是,佛陀不在边地显现。所以,导师没法去。派舍利弗、目犍连这些大弟子去,也许可以。不过,我要是听说长老们住在边地,就该派人把他们请到身边来供养才对。所以,长老们也不能去。那么,如果能用一种方式把教法送过去,让导师和大弟子们就像亲自去了一样,我就用这种方式把教法送过去。”这样想过之后,他让人做了一块四肘长、一拃宽、不太薄也不太厚的金板,心想:“今天我要在上面刻字。”清晨,他洗了头,受持伍波萨他戒,吃过早饭,摘下花鬘和璎珞,手拿盛着朱砂的金匣,从底层开始一层层关上各道门,登上宫殿,打开朝东的狮子窗,坐在露台上,在金板上刻字:“于此世间,如来出现——阿拉汉、正自觉者、明行具足、善逝、世间解、无上调御丈夫、天人师、佛陀、世尊。”他先把佛陀的功德刻了一部分。巴利
‘‘Sundaraṃ tātā’’ti rājā tuṭṭho cintesi – ‘‘sakkā bhaveyya janasaṅgahatthāya mayhaṃ sahāyassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ pesetuṃ, buddhā pana paccantimesu janapadesu na aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapenti. Tasmā satthārā gantuṃ na sakkā. Sāriputtamoggallānādayo mahāsāvake pesetuṃ sakkā bhaveyya. Mayā pana ‘therā paccante vasantī’ti sutvāpi manusse pesetvā te attano samīpaṃ āṇāpetvā upaṭṭhātumeva yuttaṃ. Tasmā na therehipi sakkā gantuṃ. Yena panākārena sāsane pesite satthā ca mahāsāvakā ca gatā viya honti, tenākārena sāsanaṃ pahiṇissāmī’’ti. Cintetvā caturatanāyāmaṃ vidatthimattaputhulaṃ nātitanuṃ nātibahalaṃ suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ kārāpetvā ‘‘tattha ajja akkharāni likhissāmī’’ti. Pātova sīsaṃ nhāyitvā uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya bhuttapātarāso apanītagandhamālābharaṇo suvaṇṇasarakena jātihiṅgulikaṃ ādāya heṭṭhato paṭṭhāya dvārāni pidahanto pāsādamāruyha pubbadisāmukhaṃ sīhapañjaraṃ vivaritvā ākāsatale nisīditvā suvaṇṇapaṭṭe akkharāni likhanto – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppanno arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṃ buddho bhagavā’’ti. Buddhaguṇe tāva ekadesena likhi.
随后,他这样圆满了十种巴拉密,从兜率天去世,入母胎结生;当时出现了这样的世间显现;住在母胎时,有这样的事;在家生活时,有这样的事;他这样大出家,这样勤修大精进。经过这样的难行之后,他登上大菩提座,坐在不败座上,证悟了一切知智;当他证悟一切知智时,出现了这样的世间显现。在包括天界在内的世间里,再没有别的这样的珍宝了。巴利
Tato ‘‘evaṃ dasa pāramiyo pūretvā tusitabhavanato cavitvā mātukucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi , evaṃ lokavivaraṇaṃ ahosi, mātukucchiyaṃ vasamāne idaṃ nāma ahosi, agāramajjhe vasamāne idaṃ nāma ahosi, evaṃ mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto evaṃ mahāpadhānaṃ padahi. Evaṃ dukkarakārikaṃ katvā mahābodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha aparājitapallaṅke nisinno sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhi, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhantassa evaṃ lokavivaraṇaṃ ahosi. Sadevake loke aññaṃ evarūpaṃ ratanaṃ nāma natthīti.
无论在这世间还是在他方世界,任何财富,
在天界中,无论什么殊胜的宝物;
对我们来说,没有与如来相等者。
这也是佛陀中的殊胜珍宝。
以此真实语,愿得安稳乐。巴利
Yaṃkiñci vittaṃ idha vā huraṃ vā, Saggesu vā yaṃ ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ; Na no samaṃ atthi tathāgatena, Idampi buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ; Etena saccena suvatthi hotū’’ti. (khu. pā. 6.3; su. ni. 226) –
就这样,先简略地写了佛陀的功德,接着赞叹第二种宝——法宝:“法是由世尊善说的……(中略)……应当由智者各自证知。”
“四念处……(中略)……圣八支道。”
“导师所说的法,就是这样的、这样的。”这样简略地写了三十七菩提分法之后——巴利
Evaṃ ekadesena buddhaguṇepi likhitvā dutiyaṃ dhammaratanaṃ thomento – ‘‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo…pe… paccattaṃ veditabbo viññūhī’’ti. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā…pe… ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti. ‘‘Satthārā desitadhammo nāma evarūpo ca evarūpo cā’’ti sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiye ekadesena likhitvā –
“ 最胜佛陀所赞叹的清净之定,
人们说,这即无间。
没有任何定能跟这种定相比。
这也同样是法中殊胜的宝。
以此真实语,愿有安乐!”(Etena saccena suvatthi hotū)巴利
‘‘Yaṃ buddhaseṭṭho parivaṇṇayī suciṃ, Samādhimānantarikaññamāhu; Samādhinā tena samo na vijjati, Idampi dhamme ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ; Etena saccena suvatthi hotū’’ti. (khu. pā. 6.5; su. ni. 228) –
这样用简略的方式写下法的功德之后,为了赞叹第三僧宝,说道:“世尊的声闻僧团是善行道者……乃至……是世间的无上福田。”所谓“善男子”,就是听闻导师说法后,像这样离家出家的人。他们当中,有的舍弃白伞而出家,有的舍弃副王之位,有的舍弃将军之位等而出家。出家之后,他们又圆满这种修行。他简略地写下小戒、中戒、大戒等,以及六门防护、正念正知、四种资具知足、九种住处、断除五盖、准备工作、禅那与神通、三十八种业处,直到漏尽,都简略地记录。详细写下十六种入出息念业处之后,说道:“所谓导师的声闻僧团,就是具备这样种种功德。”巴利
Evaṃ ekadesena dhammaguṇe likhitvā tatiyaṃ saṅgharatanaṃ thomento – ‘‘suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho…pe… puññakkhettaṃ lokassā’’ti. ‘‘Kulaputtā nāma satthu dhammakathaṃ sutvā evaṃ nikkhamitvā pabbajanti, keci setacchattaṃ pahāya pabbajanti, keci uparajjaṃ, keci senāpatiṭṭhānādīni pahāya pabbajanti. Pabbajitvā ca pana imañca paṭipattiṃ pūrentī’’ti cūḷasīlamajjhimasīlamahāsīlādīni ekadesena likhitvā chadvārasaṃvaraṃ satisampajaññaṃ catupaccayasantosaṃ navavidhaṃ senāsanaṃ, nīvaraṇappahānaṃ parikammaṃ jhānābhiññā aṭṭhatiṃsa kammaṭṭhānāni yāva āsavakkhayā ekadesena likhi, soḷasavidhaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ vitthāreneva likhitvā ‘‘satthu sāvakasaṅgho nāma evarūpehi ca guṇehi samannāgato.
善士所赞此八辈,
即是四双之圣众。
他们是善逝的声闻弟子,是应供者,
布施给这些人,果报很大。
这也是僧团中殊胜的宝,
以此真实语,愿有安乐!(Etena saccena suvatthi hotū)巴利
Ye puggalā aṭṭhasataṃ pasaṭṭhā, Cattāri etāni yugāni honti; Te dakkhiṇeyyā sugatassa sāvakā, Etesu dinnāni mahapphalāni; Idampi saṅghe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ, Etena saccena suvatthi hotū’’ti. (khu. pā. 6.6; su. ni. 229) –
他这样简略地写下僧团的功德后,又写道:“世尊的教法是善说的、能引导人出离的,如果我的朋友有能力,就请他离家出家吧。”写完以后,把金片卷起来,用细软的毛毯包好,放进檀木盒里;然后把这个檀木盒放进金盒,金盒放进银盒,银盒放进宝石盒,宝石盒放进珊瑚盒,珊瑚盒放进红宝石盒,红宝石盒放进猫眼石盒,猫眼石盒放进水晶盒,水晶盒放进象牙盒,象牙盒放进众宝盒,众宝盒放进藤盒,最后把藤盒安放在一个檀木函里。巴利
Evaṃ ekadesena saṅghaguṇe likhitvā – ‘‘bhagavato sāsanaṃ svākkhātaṃ niyyānikaṃ, sace mayhaṃ sahāyo sakkoti, nikkhamitvā pabbajatū’’ti likhitvā suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ saṃharitvā sukhumakambalena veṭhetvā sārasamugge pakkhipitvā taṃ samuggaṃ suvaṇṇamaye, suvaṇṇamayaṃ, rajatamaye rajatamayaṃ maṇimaye, maṇimayaṃ pavāḷamaye, pavāḷamayaṃ lohitaṅkamaye, lohitaṅkamayaṃ masāragallamaye, masāragallamayaṃ phalikamaye, phalikamayaṃ dantamaye, dantamayaṃ sabbaratanamaye, sabbaratanamayaṃ kilañjamaye, kilañjamayaṃ samuggaṃ sārakaraṇḍake ṭhapesi.
然后,他又像前面那样,把檀香盒放进金盒里,再把众宝制成的盒子放进藤盒里。接着,又像前面说的那样,把藤盒放进檀香木箱,再把众宝制成的箱子放进藤箱,外面用布包好,盖上国王的印信,然后命令大臣们:“在我政令所及的地方,把道路装饰起来。道路要有八牛呼宽,其中四牛呼的地方只要打扫干净就行,中间四牛呼的地方,要用国王的威仪布置好。”然后,他让人装饰吉祥象,在象背上铺设坐垫,撑起白伞,又让人把城里街道洒扫干净,竖起幢幡,用芭蕉、满水罐、香、烟、花等物装饰得十分庄严。他又派快使到各附属小王那里传话:“在你们各自管辖的地方,也要这样供养。”他自己也穿戴好一切装饰,说:“我要让所有乐师和各种兵众围绕,派人把礼物送去。”他来到自己领土的边界,给一位大臣留下口信:“亲爱的,我的朋友布咕萨提接受这份礼物时,不要在后宫眷属中间接受,要登上宫殿再接受。”如此交付口信后,心想“导师正前往边地”,便以五体投地礼敬后返回。那些附属小王也按同样的方式布置好道路,把礼物送了过去。巴利
Puna sārakaraṇḍakaṃ suvaṇṇakaraṇḍaketi purimanayeneva haritvā sabbaratanamayaṃ karaṇḍakaṃ kilañjamaye karaṇḍake ṭhapesi. Tato kilañjamayaṃ karaṇḍakaṃ sāramayapeḷāyāti puna vuttanayeneva haritvā sabbaratanamayaṃ peḷaṃ kilañjamayapeḷāya ṭhapetvā bahi vatthena veṭhetvā rājamuddikāya lañchetvā amacce āṇāpesi – ‘‘mama āṇāpavattiṭṭhāne maggaṃ alaṅkārāpetha maggo aṭṭhusabhavitthato hotu, catuusabhaṭṭhānaṃ sodhitamattakameva hotu, majjhe catuusabhaṃ rājānubhāvena paṭiyādethā’’ti. Tato maṅgalahatthiṃ alaṅkārāpetvā tassa upari pallaṅkaṃ paññapetvā setacchattaṃ ussāpetvā nagaravīthiyo sittasammaṭṭhā samussitaddhajapaṭākā kadalipuṇṇaghaṭagandhadhūmapupphādīhi suppaṭimaṇḍitā kāretvā ‘‘attano attano visayappadese evarūpaṃ pūjaṃ kārentū’’ti antarabhogikānaṃ javanadūte pesetvā sayaṃ sabbālaṅkārena alaṅkaritvā – ‘‘sabbatāḷāvacarasammissabalakāyaparivuto paṇṇākāraṃ pesemī’’ti attano visayapariyantaṃ gantvā amaccassa mukhasāsanaṃ adāsi – ‘‘tāta mayhaṃ sahāyo pukkusāti imaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ paṭicchanto orodhamajjhe apaṭicchitvā pāsādaṃ āruyha paṭicchatū’’ti. Evaṃ sāsanaṃ datvā paccantadesaṃ satthā gacchatīti pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā nivatti. Antarabhogikā teneva niyāmena maggaṃ paṭiyādetvā paṇṇākāraṃ nayiṃsu.
布咕萨提也从自己国境的边界开始,用同样的方式把道路修整好,又让人把都城装饰起来,然后亲自去迎接那份礼品。送礼品的人到达塔迦尸喇时,正好赶上伍波萨他日。那位带着礼品前去的大臣,也把国王交代的话转达了。国王听完之后,先安排好随礼品一起来的人该做的事,然后拿着礼品登上宫殿,下令说:“这里谁也不许进来!”又在门口安排了守卫。他打开狮子窗,把礼品放在高座上,自己坐在低座上,拆掉封印,去掉外面的包布,从藤箱开始一层层打开。看到那个檀香木盒子时,他心里想:“这么大的排场,这肯定不是用来装别的东西的,一定是中部地区出现了值得一听的宝物。”于是他打开那个盒子,破开国王的印信,把细软的毛毯向两边拨开,看见了那片金叶。巴利
Pukkusātipi attano rajjasīmato paṭṭhāya teneva niyāmena maggaṃ paṭiyādetvā nagaraṃ alaṅkārāpetvā paṇṇākārassa paccuggamanaṃ akāsi. Paṇṇākāro takkasīlaṃ pāpuṇanto uposathadivase pāpuṇi, paṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā gataamaccopi rañño vuttasāsanaṃ ārocesi. Rājā taṃ sutvā paṇṇākārena saddhiṃ āgatānaṃ kattabbakiccaṃ vicāretvā paṇṇākāraṃ ādāya pāsādaṃ āruyha ‘‘mā idha koci pavisatū’’ti dvāre ārakkhaṃ kāretvā sīhapañjaraṃ vivaritvā paṇṇākāraṃ uccāsane ṭhapetvā sayaṃ nīcāsane nisinno lañchanaṃ bhinditvā nivāsanaṃ apanetvā kilañjapeḷato paṭṭhāya anupubbena vivaranto sāramayaṃ samuggaṃ disvā cintesi – ‘‘mahāparihāro nāyaṃ aññassa ratanassa bhavissati, addhā majjhimadese sotabbayuttakaṃ ratanaṃ uppanna’’nti. Atha taṃ samuggaṃ vivaritvā rājalañchanaṃ bhinditvā sukhumakambalaṃ ubhato viyūhitvā suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ addasa.
他把那片金叶展开,从“这些文字真是可爱,字头整齐,行列平直,四四方方”开始读起来。当他读到“于此世间,如来出现”这些赞叹佛陀功德的文字时,心中生起了极强的欢喜,身上九万九千根毛孔都竖了起来。他连自己是站着还是坐着都不知道。接着他又想:“这样的教法,即使经过百千亿劫也难以遇到,如今我靠朋友的因缘才得以听闻!”于是更强烈的喜悦生起。他因为太欢喜,没法继续往下读,就坐下来,等喜悦的势头平息之后,又接着读“世尊善说之法”这些赞叹法的文字。读到这里,同样的情况又发生了。他再次坐下来,等喜悦平息后,又接着读“善行道者”这些赞叹僧团的文字。读到这里,还是一样。最后,在整封信的末尾,他读到了入出息念这一修行法门,并由此生起了四禅和五禅。他就这样以禅那的快乐度日。这期间别人都见不到他,只有一位年少侍者能进来。就这样过了大约半个月。巴利
So taṃ pasāretvā – ‘‘manāpāni vata akkharāni samasīsāni samapantīni caturassānī’’tiādito paṭṭhāya vācetuṃ ārabhi. Tassa – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppanno’’ti buddhaguṇe vācentassa balavasomanassaṃ uppajji, navanavutilomakūpasahassāni uddhaggalomāni ahesuṃ. Attano ṭhitabhāvaṃ vā nisinnabhāvaṃ vā na jānāti. Athassa – ‘‘kappakoṭisatasahassehipi etaṃ dullabhasāsanaṃ sahāyaṃ nissāya sotuṃ labhāmī’’ti bhiyyo balavapīti udapādi. So hi upari vācetuṃ asakkonto yāva pītivegapassaddhiyā nisīditvā parato – ‘‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo’’ti dhammaguṇe ārabhi. Tatrāpissa tatheva ahosi. So puna yāva pītivegapassaddhiyā nisīditvā parato ‘‘suppaṭipanno’’ti saṅghaguṇe ārabhi . Tatrāpissa tatheva ahosi. Atha sabbapariyante ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ vācetvā catukkapañcakajjhānāni nibbattesi, so jhānasukheneva vītināmesi. Añño koci daṭṭhuṃ na labhati, ekova cūḷupaṭṭhāko pavisati. Evaṃ addhamāsamattaṃ vītināmesi.
城里人聚集在王宫广场上,大声喊道:“自从收了那份礼物那天起,既没有阅兵,也没有看戏,更没有审理案件。国王若愿意,就把朋友送来的礼物展示给他所愿意的人看。有些国王就是借着收别人的礼物来行骗,想自己独吞王位。我们的国王到底在干什么?”国王听到喊声,心里想:“我到底是继续掌着王位,还是持守导师?”接着又想:“身为国王这个身份,连算师、大算师都算不清。我要护持导师的教法。”于是他从床上拿起剑,割断头发,打开狮子窗,把连同顶髻宝珠的一把头发扔到众人中间,说:“拿去,你们来治理国家吧。”大众捡起那把头发,齐声高喊:“从朋友那里收到礼物的国王,就是像您这样啊,陛下!”这时国王的须发只剩下大约两指长。据说,那样子就跟菩萨出家时一模一样。巴利
Nāgarā rājaṅgaṇe sannipatitvā ukkuṭṭhiṃ akaṃsu ‘‘paṇṇākāraṃ paṭicchitadivasato paṭṭhāya baladassanaṃ vā nāṭakadassanaṃ vā natthi, vinicchayadānaṃ natthi, rājā sahāyena pahitaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ yassicchati tassa dassetu, rājāno nāma ekaccassa paṇṇākāravasenapi vañcetvā rajjaṃ attano kātuṃ vāyamanti. Kiṃ nāma amhākaṃ rājā karotī’’ti? Rājā ukkuṭṭhisaddaṃ sutvā – ‘‘rajjaṃ nu kho dhāremi, udāhu satthāra’’nti cintesi. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘rajjakāritaattabhāvo nāma neva gaṇakena, na gaṇakamahāmattena gaṇetuṃ sakko. Satthusāsanaṃ dhāressāmī’’ti sayane ṭhapitaṃ asiṃ gahetvā kese chinditvā sīhapañjaraṃ vivaritvā – ‘‘etaṃ gahetvā rajjaṃ kārethā’’ti saddhiṃ cūḷāmaṇinā kesakalāpaṃ parisamajjhe pātesi, mahājano taṃ ukkhipitvā – ‘‘sahāyakasantikā laddhapaṇṇākārā nāma rājāno tumhādisā honti devā’’ti ekappahāreneva viravi. Raññopi dvaṅgulamattaṃ kesamassu ahosi. Bodhisattassa pabbajjāsadisameva kira jātaṃ.
然后他派小侍从去,从市场取来两件袈裟和一只陶钵。他为了导师而说:“世间的阿拉汉,我为了他们而出家。”他为了导师,穿上一件袈裟作下衣,披上一件作上衣,把钵挂在左肩,拿起行杖,心想:“我的出家相到底庄不庄严呢?”在大厅里来回走了几趟,然后想:“我的出家相很庄严。”便打开门,走下高楼。可是当他走下来时,在三道门口站着的舞者等人虽然看见了他,却没认出来。据说他们心想:“有一位独觉佛来给我们的国王说法了。”等他们登上高楼,看到国王站过、坐过的地方,才知道国王已经走了,于是就像船在大海中央沉没时的人们一样,一下子放声大哭。这位善男子刚踏上地面,十八种军兵、所有城民和武装部队就把他团团围住,发出巨大的哭声。大臣们也对他说:“陛下,中部地区的国王们向来诡计多端。您会先派人送信,探明所谓佛宝到底有没有出现在世间,然后才去。请您回去吧,陛下!”他说:“我相信我的朋友,我和他之间从来没有过两舌欺诳的话。你们留在这里吧。”但那些人还是跟着他走了。巴利
Tato cūḷupaṭṭhākaṃ pesetvā antarāpaṇā dve kāsāyavatthāni mattikāpattañca āharāpetvā – ‘‘ye loke arahanto, te uddissa mayhaṃ pabbajjā’’ti satthāraṃ uddissa ekaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā ekaṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ vāmaaṃsakūṭe katvā kattaradaṇḍaṃ gahetvā – ‘‘sobhati nu kho me pabbajjā no vā’’ti mahātale katipayavāre aparāparaṃ caṅkamitvā – ‘‘sobhati me pabbajjā’’ti dvāraṃ vivaritvā pāsādā otari. Otarantaṃ pana naṃ tīsu dvāresu ṭhitanāṭakādīni disvāpi na sañjāniṃsu. ‘‘Eko paccekabuddho amhākaṃ rañño dhammakathaṃ kathetuṃ āgato’’ti kira cintayiṃsu. Uparipāsādaṃ pana āruyha rañño ṭhitanisinnaṭṭhānāni disvā rājā gatoti ñatvā samuddamajjhe osīdamānāya nāvāya jano viya ekappahāreneva viraviṃsu. Kulaputtaṃ bhūmitalaṃ otiṇṇamattaṃ aṭṭhārasaseniyo sabbe nāgarā balakāyā ca parivāretvā mahāviravaṃ viraviṃsu. Amaccāpi taṃ etadavocuṃ – ‘‘deva majjhimadesarājāno nāma bahumāyā, sāsanaṃ pesetvā buddharatanaṃ nāma loke uppannaṃ vā no vāti ñatvā gamissatha , nivattatha devā’’ti. Saddahāmahaṃ mayhaṃ sahāyakassa, tassa mayā saddhiṃ dvejjhavacanaṃ nāma natthi, tiṭṭhatha tumheti. Te anugacchantiyeva.
良家子用行杖划了一条线,问道:“这个王国是谁的?”众人回答:“是您的,陛下。”他又说:“谁要是越过这条线,就按王法处置。”在《大那罗迦本生》里,菩萨划下的那条线,斯瓦离王后不敢越过,哭着转身离开了。大众就沿着她走的路走去。可是那条线,大众确实不敢越过,他们把那条线看成不可逾越的界限,一边哭一边转身,放声哀号。良家子心想:“在我要去的地方,哪怕连一个给我递齿木或漱口水的人都不会有。”于是他连一个侍从都不带,就独自离开了。据说他心里这样想:“我的导师行了伟大的出离,出家时也是独自一人。”他又想:“我对导师感到惭愧。”还想:“听说导师出家后,连车乘都没有坐。”所以他连一双单层拖鞋都不穿,连一把树叶伞也不拿。大众爬上树、城墙、塔楼,望着说:“那是我们的国王,他走了!”良家子心想:“路很远,一个人走不完。”于是就跟在一队商旅后面走。这位娇生惯养的良家子走在坚硬的地面上,脚底起了水泡,水泡破了,生起苦受。商旅扎营休息时,良家子离开道路,坐到一棵树下。在他坐下的地方,没有人给他按摩脚或按摩背。良家子进入以出入息为所缘的第四禅,压伏了旅途的疲劳、困顿和热恼,以禅悦度过时光。巴利
Kulaputto kattaradaṇḍena lekhaṃ katvā – ‘‘idaṃ rajjaṃ kassā’’ti āha? Tumhākaṃ devāti. Yo imaṃ lekhaṃ antaraṃ karoti, rājāṇāya kāretabboti. Mahājanakajātake bodhisattena katalekhaṃ sīvalidevī antaraṃ kātuṃ avisahantī vivattamānā agamāsi. Tassā gatamaggena mahājano agamāsi. Taṃ pana lekhaṃ mahājano antaraṃ kātuṃ na visahi, lekhaṃ ussīsakaṃ katvā vivattamānā viraviṃsu. Kulaputto ‘‘ayaṃ me gataṭṭhāne dantakaṭṭhaṃ vā mukhodakaṃ vā dassatī’’ti antamaso ekaceṭakampi aggahetvā pakkāmi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘mama satthā ca mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamitvā ekakova pabbajito’’ti ekakova agamāsi. ‘‘Satthu lajjāmī’’ti ca – ‘‘satthā kira me pabbajitvā yānaṃ nāruḷho’’ti ca antamaso ekapaṭalikampi upāhanaṃ nāruhi, paṇṇacchattakampi na dhāresi. Mahājano rukkhapākāraṭṭālakādīni āruyha esa amhākaṃ rājā gacchatīti olokesi. Kulaputto – ‘‘dūraṃ gantabbaṃ, na sakkā ekena maggo nittharitu’’nti ekaṃ satthavāhaṃ anubandhi. Sukhumālassa kulaputtassa kaṭhinatattāya pathaviyā gachantassa pādatalesu phoṭā uṭṭhahitvā bhijjanti, dukkhā vedanā uppajjanti. Satthavāhe khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā nisinne kulaputto maggā okkamma ekasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdati. Nisinnaṭṭhāne pādaparikammaṃ vā piṭṭhiparikammaṃ vā kattā nāma natthi, kulaputto ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā maggadarathakilamathapariḷāhaṃ vikkhambhetvā jhānaratiyā vītināmeti.
第二天黎明,他起身整理好身体,又跟上了商队首领。到了吃早饭的时候,他们接过良家子的钵,把硬食和软食放进钵里给他。那些食物有的还是生米,有的湿了,有的混着沙砾,有的没放盐,有的又太咸。良家子先观察了进入身体的地方,然后像吃甘露一样吃下去,就这样走了差八由旬满两百由旬的路程。可是当他走近祇园精舍门口时,也没有问“导师住在哪里”。为什么呢?既因为对导师的恭敬,也因为国王派他送信的缘故。因为国王是把信写成“如来出现于世间”这样,把导师当成好像是在王舍城出现的一样,所以他没有问,就走过了大约四十五由旬的路。他在日落时分到达王舍城,才问导师住在哪里。人们反问:尊者,您从哪里来?他说:从北方来。人们告诉他:导师就在您来的那条路上,离这里大约四十五由旬的地方,有个叫舍卫城的地方,导师住在那里。良家子心想:现在时间晚了,走不了了,今天就在这里住一夜,明天再去导师那里。于是他问:非时到达的出家人在哪里住?人们说:在这间陶匠的屋子里,尊者。于是他向那位陶匠请求,进去住下,坐了下来。巴利
Punadivase uṭṭhite aruṇe sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā puna satthavāhaṃ anubandhati. Pātarāsakāle kulaputtassa pattaṃ gahetvā khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ patte pakkhipitvā denti. Taṃ uttaṇḍulampi hoti kilinnampi samasakkharampi aloṇātiloṇampi, kulaputto pavisanaṭṭhānaṃ paccavekkhitvā amataṃ viya paribhuñjitvā etena niyāmena aṭṭhahi ūnakāni dve yojanasatāni gato. Jetavanadvārakoṭṭhakassa pana samīpena gacchantopi – ‘‘kahaṃ satthā vasatī’’ti nāpucchi. Kasmā? Satthugāravena ceva rañño pesitasāsanavasena ca. Rañño hi – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti satthāraṃ rājagahe uppannaṃ viya katvā sāsanaṃ pesitaṃ, tasmā naṃ apucchitvāva pañcacattālīsayojanamattaṃ maggaṃ atikkanto. So sūriyatthaṅgamanavelāya rājagahaṃ patvā satthā kahaṃ vasatīti pucchi. Kuto nu, bhante, āgatoti? Ito uttaratoti. Satthā tuyhaṃ āgatamagge ito pañcacattālīsayojanamatte sāvatthi nāma atthi, tattha vasatīti. Kulaputto cintesi – ‘‘idāni akālo na sakkā gantuṃ, ajja idheva vasitvā sve satthu santikaṃ gamissāmī’’ti. Tato – ‘‘vikāle sampattapabbajitā kahaṃ vasantī’’ti pucchi. Imāya kumbhakārasālāya, bhanteti. Atha so taṃ kumbhakāraṃ yācitvā tattha vāsatthāya pavisitvā nisīdi.
世尊也在那天清晨观察世间时看见了布咕萨提,心里想:这位良家子只读了朋友捎来的那封简短书信,就舍弃了超过三百由旬的大王国,为了我而出家,走了一百九十二由旬的路,到达王舍城了。如果我不去,他还没证得三种沙门果,就会在只住一夜之后毫无意义地死去;如果我去,他就能证得三种沙门果。我为了摄受众生,已经用十万大劫再加四个不可计数劫的时间圆满了巴拉密,我要去摄受他。于是世尊清晨整理好身体,由比丘僧团围绕,在舍卫城托钵乞食。饭后从乞食处回来,进入香室,稍作休息,缓解了身体的疲劳。然后他想:这位良家子出于对我的恭敬,做了极难做到的事。他舍弃了超过一百由旬的王国,连一个给他端洗脸水的仆人都没带,独自一人出来了。于是他没有告诉舍利弗、大目犍连等任何人,自己拿了衣钵,独自一人出发了。在路上,他既没有腾空飞行,也没有缩地而行,而是想:这位良家子因为对我心怀恭敬和惭愧,象、马、车、金轿等任何交通工具都没坐,甚至连一双单层拖鞋都没穿就出来了,那我也应该步行前往。于是他步行而去。巴利
Bhagavāpi taṃdivasaṃ paccūsakāle lokaṃ volokento pukkusātiṃ disvā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ kulaputto sahāyena pesitaṃ sāsanamattakaṃ vācetvā atirekatiyojanasatikaṃ mahārajjaṃ pahāya maṃ uddissa pabbajitvā aṭṭhahi ūnakāni dve yojanasatāni atikkamma rājagahaṃ pāpuṇissati, mayi agacchante pana tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni appaṭivijjhitvā ekarattivāsena anāthakālakiriyaṃ karissati, mayi pana gate tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni paṭivijjhissati. Janasaṅgahatthāyeva pana mayā satasahassakappādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūritā, karissāmi tassa saṅgaha’’nti pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto sāvatthiyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā muhuttaṃ attadarathakilamathaṃ paṭipassambhetvā – ‘‘kulaputto mayi gāravena dukkaraṃ akāsi, atirekayojanasataṃ rajjaṃ pahāya antamaso mukhadhovanadāyakampi ceṭakaṃ aggahetvā ekakova nikkhanto’’ti sāriputtamahāmoggallānādīsu kañci anāmantetvā sayameva attano pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā ekakova nikkhanto. Gacchanto ca neva ākāse uppati, na pathaviṃ saṃkhipi, – ‘‘kulaputto mama lajjamāno hatthiassarathasuvaṇṇasivikādīsu ekayānepi anisīditvā antamaso ekapaṭalikaṃ upāhanampi anāruyha paṇṇacchattakampi aggahetvā nikkhanto, mayāpi padasāva gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti pana cintetvā padasāva agamāsi.
他隐藏了八十种随形好、一寻身光和三十二种大人相这套佛陀的庄严光辉,就像满月被云层遮住一样,然后以一位普通比丘的形象出行。仅在一个午后的时间里,他就走过了四十五由旬。日落时分,当那位良家子刚刚踏进陶匠的住处时,他也正好到达了那间陶匠的草堂。针对这件事,经中这样说:“那时,有一位名叫布咕萨提的良家子,因为仰慕世尊,怀着信心,从在家出家,过无家的生活。他就是第一个住进那间陶匠住处的人。”巴利
So asīti anubyañjanāni byāmappabhā bāttiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇānīti imaṃ buddhasiriṃ paṭicchādetvā valāhakapaṭicchanno puṇṇacando viya aññatarabhikkhuvesena gacchanto ekapacchābhatteneva pañcacattālīsa yojanāni atikkamma sūriyatthaṅgamalīvelāya kulaputte paviṭṭhamatteyeva taṃ kumbhakārasālaṃ pāpuṇi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena, pukkusāti, nāma kulaputto bhagavantaṃ uddissa saddhāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito, so tasmiṃ kumbhakārāvesane paṭhamaṃ vāsūpagato hotī’’ti.
世尊到了之后,也没有仗着“我是正自觉者”就硬闯进陶匠的草屋,而是站在门口,向那位良家子请求让个地方,说了“如果比丘们方便的话”这样的话。所谓“空旷”,就是没有遮挡、不拥挤。“具寿安住,随乐而住”,意思是:具寿啊,你觉得哪种威仪姿势舒服,就按那种姿势怎么舒服怎么住——他就这样让出了地方。这位良家子可是舍弃了一百多由旬的国土才出家的,别人丢弃的破陶匠草屋,他怎么会对同梵行的人吝啬呢?可有些愚人,在教法里出家之后,被住处悭吝等烦恼压住,在自己住的地方就盘算“这是我的小屋,这是我的精舍范围”,想方设法不让别人住。世尊这位极其柔嫩的人天导师,离开了像天宫一样的香室,在那间到处散落着灰烬、碎陶片、草叶,还有鸡粪猪粪等污秽、跟垃圾堆差不多的陶匠草屋里,铺上草垫,展开粪扫衣,就像走进散发着天香的天宫香室坐下一样,坐了下来。巴利
Evaṃ gantvāpi pana bhagavā – ‘‘ahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti pasayha kumbhakārasālaṃ apavisitvā dvāre ṭhitova kulaputtaṃ okāsaṃ kārento sace te bhikkhūtiādimāha. Urundanti vivittaṃ asambādhaṃ. Viharatāyasmā yathāsukhanti yena yena iriyāpathena phāsu hoti, tena tena yathāsukhaṃ āyasmā viharatūti okāsaṃ akāsi. Atirekatiyojanasatañhi rajjaṃ pahāya pabbajito kulaputto parassa chaḍḍitapatitaṃ kumbhakārasālaṃ kiṃ aññassa sabrahmacārino maccharāyissati. Ekacce pana moghapurisā sāsane pabbajitvā āvāsamacchariyādīhi abhibhūtā attano vasanaṭṭhāne mayhaṃ kuṭi mayhaṃ pariveṇanti aññesaṃ avāsāya parakkamanti. Nisīdīti accantasukhumālo lokanātho devavimānasadisaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ pahāya tattha tattha vippakiṇṇachārikāya bhinnabhājanatiṇapalāsakukkuṭasūkaravaccādisaṃkiliṭṭhāya saṅkāraṭṭhānasadisāya kumbhakārasālāya tiṇasanthāraṃ santharitvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññapetvā devavimānasadisaṃ dibbagandhasugandhaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā nisīdanto viya nisīdi.
世尊降生在从未中断的大选举王统中,那位善男子也出生在刹帝利家族里。世尊具足宿愿,善男子也具足宿愿。世尊舍弃王位出家,善男子也一样。世尊身色如金,善男子也一样。世尊证得定,善男子也一样。这样,两人都是刹帝利,两人都具足宿愿,两人都是舍王位出家,两人都是金色身,两人都是得定者,他们走进陶匠的草舍坐下。因此,那陶匠的草舍显得格外光辉庄严,就像两头狮子等进入洞穴一样,应当用比喻来说明。不过,在这两人当中,世尊根本没有生起这样的念头:“我极其娇贵,极其柔嫩,只在一个午后的时间里走了四十五由旬,暂且躺下来行狮子卧,消除旅途的疲劳吧。”他就这样坐着,便入于果定。那位善男子也没有生起这样的念头:“我走了一百九十二由旬,暂且躺下来消除旅途的疲劳吧。”他就这样坐着,便入于入出息念的第四禅那。经中说的“那时,世尊在后半夜……”等,就是针对这一点说的。巴利
Iti bhagavāpi asambhinnamahāsammatavaṃse uppanno, kulaputtopi khattiyagabbhe vaḍḍhito. Bhagavāpi abhinīhārasampanno, kulaputtopi abhinīhārasampanno. Bhagavāpi rajjaṃ pahāya pabbajito, kulaputtopi. Bhagavāpi suvaṇṇavaṇṇo, kulaputtopi. Bhagavāpi samāpattilābhī, kulaputtopi. Iti dvepi khattiyā dvepi abhinīhārasampannā dvepi rājapabbajitā dvepi suvaṇṇavaṇṇā dvepi samāpattilābhino kumbhakārasālaṃ pavisitvā nisinnāti tehi kumbhakārasālā ativiya sobhati, dvīhi sīhādīhi paviṭṭhaguhādīhi āharitvā dīpetabbaṃ. Tesu pana dvīsu bhagavā – ‘‘sukhumālo ahaṃ paramasukhumālo ekapacchābhattena pañcacattālīsa yojanāni āgato, muhuttaṃ tāva sīhaseyyaṃ kappetvā maggadarathaṃ paṭipassambhemī’’ti cittampi anuppādetvā nisīdantova phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajji. Kulaputtopi – ‘‘dvānavutiyojanasataṃ āgatomhi, muhuttaṃ tāva nipajjitvā maggadarathaṃ vinodemī’’ti cittaṃ anuppādetvā nisīdamānova ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ samāpajji. Idaṃ sandhāya atha kho bhagavā bahudeva rattintiādi vuttaṃ.
世尊不就是为了给这位善男子说法才来的吗?那为什么没有说法呢?因为这位善男子的旅途疲劳还没有完全平复,他还没办法好好领受法教,所以世尊想先让他缓过来,就没有说法。另有一种说法:王舍城人多嘈杂,不得安静,有十种声音,那些声音要到半夜过后才平息,世尊是在等那些声音停下来,所以没有说法。这种说法站不住脚,因为哪怕是像梵天世界那么大的声音,世尊也能凭自己的威力让它平息。实际上,世尊只是在等这位善男子的旅途疲劳消退,所以才没有说法。巴利
Nanu ca bhagavā kulaputtassa dhammaṃ desessāmīti āgato, kasmā na desesīti? Kulaputtassa maggadaratho appaṭipassaddho, na sakkhissati dhammadesanaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ, so tāvassa paṭipassambhatūti na desesi. Apare – ‘‘rājagahaṃ nāma ākiṇṇamanussaṃ avivittaṃ dasahi saddehi, so saddo diyaḍḍhayāmamattena sannisīdati, taṃ āgamento na desesī’’ti vadanti. Taṃ akāraṇaṃ, brahmalokappamāṇampi hi saddaṃ bhagavā attano ānubhāvena vūpasametuṃ sakkoti, maggadarathavūpasamaṃ āgamentoyeva pana na desesi.
在这里,“后半夜”指的是大约一个半更那段时间。“世尊这样想”是说,世尊从果定中出来后,就像有人在黄金宫殿里打开宝石窗一样,睁开被五种净色所庄严的双眼,放眼观察。他看见那位善男子端坐着,手、脚和头部都没有躁动,像深深埋入地下的门柱一样稳固不动,像一尊黄金像一样安坐,于是生起这样的念头:“真是令人净信……”这里“令人净信”的意思是能引发净信。不过这个词是中性名词,指的是以令人净信的威仪而行。也就是说,他这样行持,使得威仪令人净信,这就是这里的含义。因为在四种威仪中,有三种威仪并不好看:比丘行走时,手会摇动,脚会摇动,头也会摇动;站立时身体僵硬;躺卧时的威仪也让人不欢喜。然而,午后扫净白天坐的地方,铺上一块皮垫,洗净手脚,盘起四叠的跏趺坐而端坐,这样的威仪才好看。而这位善男子正是盘起跏趺坐,进入入出息念的第四禅那而安坐。世尊因为他的威仪而生起净信,便这样思惟:“真是令人净信……”巴利
Tattha bahudeva rattinti diyaḍḍhayāmamattaṃ. Etadahosīti bhagavā phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhāya suvaṇṇavimāne maṇisīhapañjaraṃ vivaranto viya pañcapasādappaṭimaṇḍitāni akkhīni ummīletvā olokesi, athassa hatthakukkuccapādakukkuccasīsakampanavirahitaṃ sunikhātaindakhīlaṃ viya niccalaṃ avibbhantaṃ suvaṇṇapaṭimaṃ viya nisinnaṃ kulaputtaṃ disvā etaṃ – ‘‘pāsādikaṃ kho’’tiādi ahosi. Tattha pāsādikanti pasādāvahaṃ. Bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ panetaṃ, pāsādikena iriyāpathena iriyati. Yathā iriyato iriyāpatho pāsādiko hoti, evaṃ iriyatīti ayamettha attho. Catūsu hi iriyāpathesu tayo iriyāpathā na sobhanti. Gacchantassa hi bhikkhuno hatthā calanti, pādā calanti, sīsaṃ calati, ṭhitassa kāyo thaddho hoti, nipannassāpi iriyāpatho amanāpo hoti, pacchābhatte pana divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā cammakhaṇḍaṃ paññapetvā sudhotahatthapādassa catusandhikapallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nipannasseva iriyāpatho sobhati. Ayañca kulaputto pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ appetvā nisīdi. Itissa iriyāpatheneva pasanno bhagavā – ‘‘pāsādikaṃ kho’’ti parivitakkesi.
我何不亲自去问一下呢?他为什么这么问?难道世尊不知道他是为了自己才出家的吗?并不是不知道。但如果世尊没有先开口问,谈话就没法展开;谈话没法展开,对话就无从产生。所以,他是为了让谈话能够建立起来,才这样发问的。巴利
Yaṃnūnāhaṃ puccheyyanti kasmā pucchati? Kiṃ bhagavā attānaṃ uddissa pabbajitabhāvaṃ na jānātīti? No na jānāti, apucchite pana kathā na patiṭṭhāti, apatiṭṭhitāya kathāya kathā na sañjāyatīti kathāpatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ pucchi.
不过,“见了之后你就会知道”,是因为如来以佛的威光赫赫照耀时,所有人都知道“这是佛陀”。这种知道并不稀奇;但把佛的威光隐藏起来,以普通乞食比丘的样子游化时,就很难被认出来。所以尊者布咕萨提说“可能认不出来”,说的正是实情。因为即使与他同坐在一间陶匠的草舍里,也认不出他。巴利
Disvāca pana jāneyyāsīti tathāgataṃ buddhasiriyā virocantaṃ ayaṃ buddhoti sabbe jānanti. Anacchariyametaṃ jānanaṃ, buddhasiriṃ pana paṭicchādetvā aññatarapiṇḍapātikavesena caranto dujjāno hoti. Iccāyasmā, pukkusāti, ‘‘na jāneyya’’nti sabhāvameva katheti. Tathā hi naṃ ekakumbhakārasālāya nisinnampi na jānāti.
“他这样想”是说,他知道了旅途的疲惫已经平息,便这样想。“如是,贤友”是说:这位良家子读了朋友托人带来的信之后,就舍弃王位出了家,心想:“我将能听到十力者的妙法开示。”出家之后,他走了这么远的路,一路上却连一个对他说“比丘,我要为你说法”的人都没遇到。所以,当他听到“比丘,我要为你说法”时,怎么会不认真听呢?他就像一头渴了鼻子的象,就像一头口渴的象。因此,他表明自己会恭敬地听闻,答道:“如是,贤友。”巴利
Etadahosīti maggadarathassa vūpasamabhāvaṃ ñatvā ahosi. Evamāvusoti kulaputto sahāyena pesitaṃ sāsanamattaṃ vācetvā rajjaṃ pahāya pabbajamāno – ‘‘dasabalassa madhuradhammadesanaṃ sotuṃ labhissāmī’’ti. Pabbajito, pabbajitvā ettakaṃ addhānaṃ āgacchanto – ‘‘dhammaṃ te bhikkhu desessāmī’’ti padamattassa vattāraṃ nālattha, so ‘‘dhammaṃ te bhikkhu desessāmī’’ti vuttaṃ kiṃ sakkaccaṃ na suṇissati. Pipāsitasoṇḍo viya hi pipāsitahatthī viya cāyaṃ, tasmā sakkaccaṃ savanaṃ paṭijānanto ‘‘evamāvuso’’ti āha.
343 343.世尊没有先讲这位善男子修行前期该走的路,而是一开头就直接说明那作为阿拉汉果立足处、究竟空性、以观智为特征的法。因为对修行前期该走的路还没清净的人,世尊会先讲这些前行:守护戒律、在感官上守好门、饮食知量、勤修不睡、七种正法以及四种禅那。但对已经清净了前行的人,世尊就不讲这些,而是直接说明那作为阿拉汉果立足处的观。这位善男子的前行已经清净了。为什么呢?因为他读了那封信后,就在殊胜的宫殿里修成了入出息第四禅,这禅定在他走九十二由旬路时起到了车乘的作用,而且他的沙弥戒也已圆满。所以,世尊没有讲前行,而是一开始就直接为他说明那作为阿拉汉果立足处、究竟空性、以观智为特征的法。巴利
343.Chadhāturo ayanti bhagavā kulaputtassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ akathetvā āditova arahattassa padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ accantasuññataṃ vipassanālakkhaṇameva ācikkhituṃ āraddho. Yassa hi pubbabhāgapaṭipadā aparisuddhā hoti, tassa paṭhamameva sīlasaṃvaraṃ indriyesu guttadvārataṃ bhojane mattaññutaṃ jāgariyānuyogaṃ satta saddhamme cattāri jhānānīti imaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ ācikkhati. Yassa panesā parisuddhā, tassa taṃ akathetvā arahattassa padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vipassanameva ācikkhati. Kulaputtassa ca pubbabhāgapaṭipadā parisuddhā. Tathā hi anena sāsanaṃ vācetvā pāsādavaragateneva ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattitaṃ, yadassa dvānavutiyojanasabhaṃ āgacchantassa yānakiccaṃ sādhesi, sāmaṇerasīlampissa paripuṇṇaṃ. Tasmā pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ akathetvā arahattassa padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ accantasuññataṃ vipassanālakkhaṇamevassa ācikkhituṃ āraddho.
在这里,“六界者”的意思是:诸界是实际存在的,而“人”并不存在。世尊有时用存在的东西来显示不存在的东西,有时用不存在的东西来显示存在的东西,有时用存在的东西来显示存在的东西,有时用不存在的东西来显示不存在的东西——这些都应该按照《一切漏经》里所说的方式详细展开。这里则是用存在的东西来显示不存在的东西,所以这样说。因为如果世尊抛开“人”这个假名,只说了“诸界”就让心这样安住下来,那位良家子可能会产生疑惑,陷入迷乱,无法接受这个教法。所以如来为了循序渐进地让他放下“人”这个假名,让他明白“众生”“人”“补特伽罗”都只是假名而已,从究竟意义上并没有所谓的“众生”,从而把心安住在界上,使他证得三种果位——如来就像《无秽经》里所说的那样,善于运用不同的说法,如同一位擅长用各种方式教人技艺的老师,因此这样开示。巴利
Tattha chadhāturoti dhātuyo vijjamānā, puriso avijjamāno. Bhagavā hi katthaci vijjamānena avijjamānaṃ dasseti, katthaci avijjamānena vijjamānaṃ, katthaci vijjamānena vijjamānaṃ, katthaci avijjamānena avijjamānanti sabbāsave vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Idha pana vijjamānena avijjamānaṃ dassento evamāha. Sace hi bhagavā purisoti paṇṇattiṃ vissajjetvā dhātuyo icceva vatvā cittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeyya, kulaputto sandehaṃ kareyya, sammohaṃ āpajjeyya, desanaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Tasmā tathāgato anupubbena purisoti paṇṇattiṃ pahāya ‘‘sattoti vā purisoti vā puggaloti vā paṇṇattimattameva, paramatthato satto nāma natthi, dhātumatteyeva cittaṃ ṭhapāpetvā tīṇi phalāni paṭivijjhāpessāmī’’ti anaṅgaṇasutte (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo) vuttabhāsantarakusalo tāya tāya bhāsāya sippaṃ uggaṇhāpento ācariyo viya evamāha.
在这里,“有六界”,所以叫“六界者”。这句话的意思是:你认定为“人”的那个东西,其实是由六界构成的;从究竟意义上说,这里并没有一个真实的“人”,“人”只是一种假名施设而已。剩下的几个词也应当按同样的方式理解。“四依处”当中,“依处”说的是立足之处,也就是四种立足处的意思。这句话的意思是:这位比丘——具有六界、六触处、十八种意近伺——当他超越这些,要证得最上成就即阿拉汉果时,就是依靠这四种立足处来证取的,所以叫“四依处”。“立于彼处”,就是安住在那些依处之中。“妄想与慢不再生起”,就是说妄想和慢不再活动。“被称为寂静牟尼”,是说漏已断尽的牟尼,被称为寂静、寂灭。“不应放逸于慧”,是为了证悟阿拉汉果的智慧,从一开始就不应放逸于止与观的智慧。“应守护真实”,是为了现证究竟真实即涅槃,从一开始就应守护言语的真实。“应增长舍离”,是为了通过阿拉汉道舍弃一切烦恼,从一开始就应修习对烦恼的舍离。“唯应学寂静”,是为了通过阿拉汉道止息一切烦恼,从一开始就应修学令烦恼止息。这样,为了证得慧依处等,这里就开示了止观智慧等前行阶段的依处。巴利
Tattha cha dhātuyo assāti chadhāturo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ tvaṃ purisoti sañjānāsi, so chadhātuko, na cettha paramatthato puriso atthi, purisoti pana paṇṇattimattamevāti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Caturādhiṭṭhānoti ettha adhiṭṭhānaṃ vuccati patiṭṭhā, catupatiṭṭhānoti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – svāyaṃ bhikkhu puriso chadhāturo chaphassāyatano aṭṭhārasamanopavicāro, so ettova vivaṭṭitvā uttamasiddhibhūtaṃ arahattaṃ gaṇhamāno imesu catūsu ṭhānesu patiṭṭhāya gaṇhātīti caturādhiṭṭhānoti. Yattha ṭhitanti yesu adhiṭṭhānesu patiṭṭhitaṃ. Maññassa vā nappavattantīti maññassa vā mānassa vā nappavattanti. Muni santoti vuccatīti khīṇāsavamuni upasanto nibbutoti vuccati. Paññaṃ nappamajjeyyāti arahattaphalapaññāya paṭivijjhanatthaṃ āditova samādhivipassanāpaññaṃ nappamajjeyya. Saccamanurakkheyyāti paramatthasaccassa nibbānassa sacchikiriyatthaṃ āditova vacīsaccaṃ rakkheyya. Cāgamanubrūheyyāti arahattamaggena sabbakilesapariccāgakaraṇatthaṃ āditova kilesapariccāgaṃ brūheyya. Santimeva so sikkheyyāti arahattamaggena sabbakilesavūpasamanatthaṃ āditova kilesavūpasamanaṃ sikkheyya. Iti paññādhiṭṭhānādīnaṃ adhigamatthāya imāni samathavipassanāpaññādīni pubbabhāgādhiṭṭhānāni vuttāni.
345 触处:就是触的处所,意思是产生。慧的决定等,应当依照前面所说的阿拉汉果慧等来了知。巴利
345.Phassāyatananti phassassa āyatanaṃ, ākaroti attho. Paññādhiṭṭhānantiādīni pubbe vuttānaṃ arahattaphalapaññādīnaṃ vasena veditabbāni.
348 348. 现在,按照所安立的论母,本来应该说“安住于何处时,妄想与慢不再生起”,但已经证得阿拉汉果之后,再用“不应放逸于慧”等话就没有必要了。因此,世尊虽然把论母按不同的次第安立,却仍然顺着法的本身来作分别,于是说出了“不应放逸于慧”等话。这里面,谁是对慧放逸?谁是对慧不放逸?如果有人在这个教法中出家后,以行医等二十一种不正当的方式谋生,无法建立起与出家身份相应的起心,这个人就叫对慧放逸。如果有人在这个教法中出家后,安住在戒上,学习佛陀的教法,受持适合自己的头陀支,选取合自己心意的业处,依靠寂静的住处,修习遍业的前行,达到禅定,然后增长观照,心想“今天就要证得阿拉汉果”,这样修行,这个人就叫对慧不放逸。在这部经里,正是通过界业处来说这种慧的不放逸。至于界业处这里应当说的内容,在前面《象迹喻经》等经中已经说过了。巴利
348. Idāni nikkhittamātikāvasena ‘‘yattha ṭhitaṃ maññassa vā nappavattantī’’ti vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, arahatte pana patte puna ‘‘paññaṃ nappamajjeyyā’’tiādīhi kiccaṃ natthi. Iti bhagavā mātikaṃ uppaṭipāṭidhātukaṃ ṭhapetvāpi yathādhammavaseneva vibhaṅgaṃ vibhajanto paññaṃ nappamajjeyyātiādimāha. Tattha ko paññaṃ pamajjati, ko nappamajjati? Yo tāva imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvā vejjakammādivasena ekavīsatividhāya anesanāya jīvikaṃ kappento pabbajjānurūpena cittuppādaṃ ṭhapetuṃ na sakkoti, ayaṃ paññaṃ pamajjati nāma. Yo pana sāsane pabbajitvā sīle patiṭṭhāya buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sappāyaṃ dhutaṅgaṃ samādāya cittarucitaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vivittaṃ senāsanaṃ nissāya kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā samāpattiṃ patvā ajjeva arahattanti vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vicarati, ayaṃ paññaṃ nappamajjati nāma. Imasmiṃ pana sutte dhātukammaṭṭhānavasena esa paññāya appamādo vutto. Dhātukammaṭṭhāne panettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā hatthipadopamasuttādīsu vuttameva.
354 “之后,只有识还会留下来”,这里也是一个单独的连结。因为前面讲的是色业处,现在为了通过受来展开并显示无色业处,所以开始了这段开示。又或者,世尊为了把这位比丘在地界等上以随顺观生起的造业识,按识界分别显示出来,也开始了这段开示。这里,“留下来”是为了什么目的而留下来?是为了导师说法的目的,也是为了善男子通达的目的而留下来。“清净”,就是没有烦恼污垢。“洁白”,就是光明净亮。“他也知道‘这是乐受’”,是指感受乐受时了知“我感受乐受”。其余两句也是如此。如果这段关于受的讨论前面没有说过,那么站在这里来说是可以的。然而它在念处经中已经说过,所以应依那里所说的方式来了知。“顺乐受”等句是为了通过缘来显示生灭而说的。其中,“顺乐受”是指作为乐受之缘的事物。其余诸句也是如此。巴利
354.Athāparaṃviññāṇaṃyeva avasissatīti ayampettha pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Heṭṭhato hi rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ, idāni arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena nibbattetvā dassetuṃ ayaṃ desanā āraddhā. Yaṃ vā panetaṃ imassa bhikkhuno pathavīdhātuādīsu āgamaniyavipassanāvasena kammakārakaviññāṇaṃ, taṃ viññāṇadhātuvasena bhājetvā dassentopi imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha avasissatīti kimatthāya avasissati? Satthu kathanatthāya kulaputtassa ca paṭivijjhanatthāya avasissati. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Pariyodātanti pabhassaraṃ. Sukhantipi vijānātīti sukhavedanaṃ vedayamāno sukhavedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānāti. Sesapadadvayesupi eseva nayo. Sace panāyaṃ vedanākathā heṭṭhā na kathitā bhaveyya, idha ṭhatvā kathetuṃ vaṭṭeyya. Satipaṭṭhāne panesā kathitāvāti tattha kathitanayeneva veditabbā. Sukhavedaniyanti evamādi paccayavasena udayatthaṅgamanadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha sukhavedaniyanti sukhavedanāya paccayabhūtaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
360 只有舍本身会留下来。到这里为止,就像一位技艺高超的宝珠师,用金刚钻在珍珠上穿孔,然后一次次把它丢到皮片上,让弟子一次次接住,再串到线上,做成珍珠垂饰、珍珠网等饰品。同样,世尊一次次解说、一次次把业处交给他,这位良家子不断作意、不断作意,使它变得纯熟。于是,他的色业处和无色业处都变得纯熟了。这时,世尊说:接下来,只有舍本身会留下来。巴利
360.Upekkhāyeva avasissatīti ettāvatā hi yathā nāma chekena maṇikārācariyena vajirasūciyā vijjhitvā cammakhaṇḍe pātetvā pātetvā dinnamuttaṃ antevāsiko gahetvā gahetvā suttagataṃ karonto muttolambakamuttajālādīni karoti, evameva bhagavatā kathetvā kathetvā dinnaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ayaṃ kulaputto manasikaronto manasikaronto paguṇaṃ akāsīti rūpakammaṭṭhānampissa arūpakammaṭṭhānampi paguṇaṃ jātaṃ, atha bhagavā ‘‘athāparaṃ upekkhāyeva avasissatī’’ti āha.
那么,剩下来的部分是为了什么目的呢?是为了导师说法的目的。也有人说是为了让善男子通达,这种说法不该采纳。因为那位善男子给同伴诵了教法之后,就站在殿堂的平台上,修成了入出息念的第四禅那;他一路走来这一段路程,这个禅那已经为他起到了车乘的作用。所以它留下来,纯粹就是为了导师说法的目的。因为就在这个地方,导师对善男子称赞了色界禅那的功德。这里说的就是:“比丘,这个色界第四禅那对你来说已经熟练了。”而“清净”等话,是对那个舍心的功德加以称述。“应捆扎火炬”的意思是:准备好炭火盆。“应点火”的意思是:把炭放进盆里,点上火,用吹管把火吹旺。“应投入炉口”的意思是:把炭拨开后,放在炭堆顶上,或者投进炽热的地方。“已除”指已除去杂质。“已澄清”指已滤去渣滓。“正是如此”的意思是:就像那块金子,可以随你所愿做成各种各样的饰品;同样地,这第四禅那的舍心,在观、神通、灭尽、入有这些当中,你希求哪一种,它就能为那种目的所用。世尊就这样称赞了它的功德。巴利
Kimatthaṃ pana avasissatīti? Satthu kathanatthaṃ. Kulaputtassa paṭivijjhanatthantipi vadanti , taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Kulaputtena hi sahāyassa sāsanaṃ vācetvā pāsādatale ṭhiteneva ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattitaṃ, yadassa ettakaṃ maggaṃ āgacchantassa yānakiccaṃ sādheti. Satthu kathanatthaṃyeva avasissati. Imasmiñhi ṭhāne satthā kulaputtassa rūpāvacarajjhāne vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘bhikkhu paguṇaṃ tava idaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhāna’’nti. Parisuddhātiādi tassāyeva upekkhāya vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Ukkaṃ bandheyyāti aṅgārakapallaṃ sajjeyya. Ālimpeyyāti tattha aṅgāre pakkhipitvā aggiṃ datvā nāḷikāya dhamento aggiṃ jāleyya. Ukkāmukhe pakkhipeyyāti aṅgāre viyūhitvā aṅgāramatthake vā ṭhapeyya, tattake vā pakkhipeyya. Nīhaṭanti nīhaṭadosaṃ. Ninnītakasāvanti apanītakasāvaṃ. Evameva khoti yathā taṃ suvaṇṇaṃ icchiticchitāya piḷandhanavikatiyā saṃvattati, evameva ayaṃ tāva catutthajjhānupekkhā vipassanā abhiññā nirodho bhavokkantīti imesu yaṃ icchati, tassatthāya hotīti vaṇṇaṃ kathesi.
为什么世尊对这位良家子在色界第四禅那上,为了断除贪爱而不讲它的过患,反而讲了它的功德呢?因为良家子对第四禅那的贪爱和随眠烦恼很强。如果世尊讲过患,良家子就可能陷入疑惑和迷乱,他会想:“我出家后走了一百九十二由旬的路来到这里,这第四禅那就像车乘一样帮我到达;我一路走来,靠的就是禅那的快乐和禅那的喜悦。他居然对这样殊胜的法讲过患,他到底是知道而说,还是不知道而说?”正因为这样,世尊才讲了它的功德。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā imasmiṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhāne nikantipariyādānatthaṃ avaṇṇaṃ akathetvā vaṇṇaṃ kathesīti. Kulaputtassa hi catutthajjhāne nikantipariyuṭṭhānaṃ balavaṃ. Sace avaṇṇaṃ katheyya, – ‘‘mayhaṃ pabbajitvā dvānavutiyojanasataṃ āgacchantassa imaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ yānakiccaṃ sādhesi, ahaṃ ettakaṃ maggaṃ āgacchanto jhānasukhena jhānaratiyā āgato, evarūpassa nāma paṇītadhammassa avaṇṇaṃ katheti, jānaṃ nu kho katheti ajāna’’nti kulaputto saṃsayaṃ sammohaṃ āpajjeyya, tasmā bhagavā vaṇṇaṃ kathesi.
361 这里,“随顺彼法”中的“法”指的是无色界禅那;因为色界禅那随顺于它,所以被称为“随顺法”。或者也可以说,异熟禅那是“法”,善禅那是“随顺法”。“因执取它”就是由于执取它。“长久、长时”指的是两万劫。这是从异熟的角度来说的。从这里往后,也是同样的道理。巴利
361.Tadanudhammanti ettha arūpāvacarajjhānaṃ dhammo nāma, taṃ anugatattā rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ anudhammoti vuttaṃ. Vipākajjhānaṃ vā dhammo, kusalajjhānaṃ anudhammo. Tadupādānāti taggahaṇā. Ciraṃ dīghamaddhānanti vīsatikappasahassāni. Vipākavasena hetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ito uttarimpi eseva nayo.
362 362. 这样用四节赞叹了无色界禅那的功德之后,现在为了显示它的过患,就说“他这样了知……”等等。其中,“此是有为”的意思是:虽然这里有长达两万劫的寿命,但它是被造作的、被构造的、被积聚的,是造作者造作出来的;它是无常的、不稳固的、不恒久的、暂时的,其性质就是坏灭、崩解、消散;它被生伴随,被老追逼,被死打击,立足于苦,没有庇护、没有洞穴、没有皈依,成为无依止之物。对于识无边处等禅那,也是同样的道理。巴利
362. Evaṃ catūhi vārehi arūpāvacarajjhānassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā idāni tasseva ādīnavaṃ dassento so evaṃ pajānātītiādimāha. Tattha saṅkhatametanti kiñcāpi ettha vīsatikappasahassāni āyu atthi, etaṃ pana saṅkhataṃ pakappitaṃ āyūhitaṃ, karontena karīyati, aniccaṃ adhuvaṃ asassataṃ tāvakālikaṃ, cavanaparibhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammaṃ, jātiyā anugataṃ, jarāya anusaṭaṃ, maraṇena abbhāhataṃ, dukkhe patiṭṭhitaṃ, atāṇaṃ aleṇaṃ asaraṇaṃ asaraṇībhūtanti. Viññāṇañcāyatanādīsupi eseva nayo.
现在,世尊以阿拉汉果为顶点来统摄整个开示,说出了“他不再造作那个……”等话。就像一位高明的医生,看到毒发症状后,让人催吐,把毒从它停留的地方赶出来,再往上引,不让它留在身体或头部,然后把毒向下导出,让它落到地上。同样地,世尊先为这位良家子讲说了无色界禅那的功德。良家子听了之后,对色界禅那的贪爱彻底断尽,转而希求无色界禅那。巴利
Idāni arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ gaṇhanto so neva taṃ abhisaṅkharotītiādimāha. Yathā hi cheko bhisakko visavikāraṃ disvā vamanaṃ kāretvā visaṃ ṭhānato cāvetvā upari āropetvā khandhaṃ vā sīsaṃ vā gahetuṃ adatvā visaṃ otāretvā pathaviyaṃ pāteyya, evameva bhagavā kulaputtassa arūpāvacarajjhāne vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. Taṃ sutvā kulaputto rūpāvacarajjhāne nikantiṃ pariyādāya arūpāvacarajjhāne patthanaṃ ṭhapesi.
世尊知道这件事后,就对那位还没有证得、还没有获得无色界禅那的比丘说:“在空无边处等地方,确实有所谓的成就。在那些地方,初禅梵天界的寿命是两万劫,第二禅梵天界是四万劫,第三禅梵天界是六万劫,第四禅梵天界是八万四千劫。但那都是无常的、不稳固的、不恒久的、只是暂时的,它的本性就是坏灭、崩解、消散;它被生跟着,被老追着,被死打击,建立在苦上面,没有庇护、没有藏身之处、没有皈依,成了没有皈依的。在那里享受这么长时间的成就之后,还是像凡夫一样死去,然后又要堕入四恶趣。”世尊用“这是有为的”这一句话,就把这一切过患全都说完了。那位善男子听了之后,对无色界禅那的贪爱就彻底断除了。世尊知道他对色界禅那和无色界禅那的贪爱都已经断尽,就以阿拉汉果作为顶点来收摄说法,说了“他不再造作那个……”等等。巴利
Bhagavā taṃ ñatvā taṃ asampattassa appaṭiladdhasseva bhikkhuno ‘‘atthesā ākāsānañcāyatanādīsu sampatti nāma. Tesañhi paṭhamabrahmaloke vīsatikappasahassāni āyu, dutiye cattālīsaṃ, tatiye saṭṭhi, catutthe caturāsīti kappasahassāni āyu. Taṃ pana aniccaṃ adhuvaṃ asassataṃ tāvakālikaṃ, cavanaparibhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammaṃ, jātiyā anugataṃ, jarāya anusaṭaṃ, maraṇena abbhāhataṃ, dukkhe patiṭṭhitaṃ, atāṇaṃ aleṇaṃ asaraṇaṃ asaraṇībhūtaṃ, ettakaṃ kālaṃ tattha sampattiṃ anubhavitvāpi puthujjanakālakiriyaṃ katvā puna catūsu apāyesu patitabba’’nti sabbametaṃ ādīnavaṃ ekapadeneva ‘‘saṅkhatameta’’nti kathesi. Kulaputto taṃ sutvā arūpāvacarajjhāne nikantiṃ pariyādiyi, bhagavā tassa rūpāvacarārūpāvacaresu nikantiyā pariyādinnabhāvaṃ ñatvā arahattanikūṭaṃ gaṇhanto ‘‘so neva taṃ abhisaṅkharotī’’tiādimāha.
又或者,好比一位大勇士讨得一位国王的欢心,得到了一个十万处所的殊胜村庄。后来国王想起他的威德,心想:“这位勇士有大威神力,他得到的太少了。”于是说:“孩子,这个村子不适合你,你另取一个四十万处所的村子吧。”他回答:“萨度,大王。”便放弃了那个村子,去取另一个村子。国王又在他还没到达那个村子时,就把他召来,派人传话:“那个村子对你有什么用?那里会闹蛇风病。在某个地方有一座大城,你去那里撑起伞盖,治理王国吧。”他便照办了。巴利
Yathā vā paneko mahāyodho ekaṃ rājānaṃ ārādhetvā satasahassuṭṭhānakaṃ gāmavaraṃ labheyya, puna rājā tassānubhāvaṃ saritvā – ‘‘mahānubhāvo yodho, appakaṃ tena laddha’’nti – ‘‘nāyaṃ tāta gāmo tuyhaṃ anucchaviko, aññaṃ catusatasahassuṭṭhānakaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti dadeyya so sādhu devāti taṃ vissajjetvā itaraṃ gāmaṃ gaṇheyya. Rājā asampattameva ca naṃ pakkosāpetvā – ‘‘kiṃ te tena, ahivātarogo ettha uppajjati? Asukasmiṃ pana ṭhāne mahantaṃ nagaraṃ atthi, tattha chattaṃ ussāpetvā rajjaṃ kārehī’’ti pahiṇeyya, so tathā kareyya.
这里应当把国王看作正自觉者,把大勇士看作良家子布咕萨提,把最初得到的村子看作入出息第四禅那。至于“放下那个村子,去拿另一个村子”这句话所说的时机,就好比在入出息第四禅那里断除了贪恋之后,开示无色界禅那。而他还没到达那个村子,国王就把他召回来,说“那个村子对你有什么用?那里会生蛇风病。某个地方有一座城,你去那里竖起伞盖,治理王国吧”——这句话所说的时机,就好比通过“无色界是有为的”等说法开示过患,让他在还没证得那些等至之前就止息了对它们的希求,然后进一步以阿拉汉果为顶点来把握教法。巴利
Tattha rājā viya sammāsambuddho daṭṭhabbo, mahāyodho viya pukkusāti kulaputto, paṭhamaladdhagāmo viya ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ, taṃ vissajjetvā itaraṃ gāmaṃ gaṇhāhīti vuttakālo viya ānāpānacatutthajjhāne nikantipariyādānaṃ katvā āruppakathanaṃ, taṃ gāmaṃ asampattameva pakkosāpetvā ‘‘kiṃ te tena, ahivātarogo ettha uppajjati? Asukasmiṃ ṭhāne nagaraṃ atthi, tattha chattaṃ ussāpetvā rajjaṃ kārehī’’ti vuttakālo viya arūpe saṅkhatametanti ādīnavakathanena appattāsuyeva tāsu samāpattīsu patthanaṃ nivatthāpetvā upari arahattanikūṭena desanāgahaṇaṃ.
在这里,“他不造作”的意思是他不努力,也不堆积。“他不思惟”的意思是他不筹划。“为了有或为了无”,是指为了增长或为了减损,也可以从常见和断见的角度来理解。“在世间不执取任何东西”,是指在世间对色等任何一法都不以渴爱抓取,也不执著。“不再有这样的状态”,是指世尊站在自己的佛陀境界上,以说法把握了阿拉汉果的顶点;而良家子则依照自己的随顺亲依止,通达了三种沙门果。就像国王用金钵吃各种美味食物,按自己的食量捏好饭团,坐在他膝上的王子对饭团表现出贪恋时,国王就把那饭团递过去,王子只按自己嘴巴的大小取食,剩下的国王自己吃,或者放回钵里。同样,法王如来按自己的尺度,以把握阿拉汉果的顶点来宣说教法,良家子则依照自己的随顺亲依止,通达了三种沙门果。巴利
Tattha neva abhisaṅkharotīti nāyūhati na rāsiṃ karoti. Na abhisañcetayatīti na kappeti. Bhavāya vā vibhavāya vāti vuddhiyā vā parihāniyā vā, sassatucchedavasenapi yojetabbaṃ. Na kiñci loke upādiyatīti loke rūpādīsu kiñci ekadhammampi taṇhāya na gaṇhāti, na parāmasati. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātīti bhagavā attano buddhavisaye ṭhatvā desanāya arahattanikūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Kulaputto pana attano yathopanissayena tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni paṭivijjhi. Yathā nāma rājā suvaṇṇabhājanena nānārasabhojanaṃ bhuñjanto attano pamāṇena piṇḍaṃ vaṭṭetvā aṅke nisinnena rājakumārena piṇḍamhi ālaye dassite taṃ piṇḍaṃ upanāmeyya, kumāro attano mukhappamāṇeneva kabaḷaṃ kareyya, sesaṃ rājā sayaṃ vā bhuñjeyya, pātiyaṃ vā pakkhipeyya, evaṃ dhammarājā tathāgato attano pamāṇena arahattanikūṭaṃ gaṇhanto desanaṃ desesi, kulaputto attano yathopanissayena tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni paṭivijjhi.
在这之前,当他听人宣说蕴、界、处这类彻底空性、贯穿三相的教法时,他既没有疑惑,也没有犹豫,更不会想“据说就是这样”“我的老师是这样说的”,因此没有那种迟疑不决、摇摆不定的状态。据说在某些情况下,诸佛会以不为人知的身份游化世间,所以他确实曾生起过怀疑:“这位真的是正自觉者吗?”也曾有过犹豫。但自从他通达了不来果之后,便确定了:“这位就是我的导师。”既然这样,他为什么不发露自己的过失呢?因为没有机会。世尊确实是按照已经安立的论母,如同将恒河之水从虚空中倾泻而下一般,不间断地宣说教法。巴利
Ito pubbe panassa khandhā dhātuyo āyatanānīti evarūpaṃ accantasuññataṃ tilakkhaṇāhataṃ kathaṃ kathentassa neva kaṅkhā, na vimati, nāpi – ‘‘evaṃ kira taṃ, evaṃ me ācariyena vutta’’nti iti kira na dandhāyitattaṃ na vitthāyitattaṃ atthi . Ekaccesu ca kira ṭhānesu buddhā aññātakavesena vicaranti, sammāsambuddho nu kho esoti ahudeva saṃsayo, ahu vimati. Yato anena anāgāmiphalaṃ paṭividdhaṃ, atha ayaṃ me satthāti niṭṭhaṃ gato. Yadi evaṃ kasmā accayaṃ na desesīti. Okāsābhāvato. Bhagavā hi yathānikkhittāya mātikāya acchinnadhāraṃ katvā ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viya desanaṃ desesiyeva.
363 “So”指阿拉汉。不被吞没:他了知这些感受不该像吞下去消化掉那样被执取。不被欢喜:他了知不该以渴爱和邪见去欢喜它们。巴利
363.Soti arahā. Anajjhositāti gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvā gahetuṃ na yutthāti pajānāti. Anabhinanditāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinandituṃ na yuttāti pajānāti.
364 364.“离结者感受它”:如果对某人来说,以乐受为所缘会生起贪随眠,以苦受为所缘会生起嗔随眠,以不苦不乐受为所缘会生起无明随眠,那就该叫“有结者感受”。但因为这些随眠不再生起,所以他是“离结者感受它”,也就是已出离、已彻底解脱。“以身为边际”:就是以身体的尽头为限。意思是,感受只生起到身体还在运作的范围为止,此后就不再生起。第二句也应同样理解。“不被欢喜的将变清凉”:因为在十二处中没有烦恼的浸润,所以这些感受不被欢喜,就在这十二处中灭尽。烦恼虽然是以涅槃为所缘而灭尽,但那个没有烦恼的地方,就说成是烦恼在那里灭尽。这个意思应当通过“就在这里,那渴爱正在灭尽时便灭尽”这一集的问题来说明。所以世尊虽然指的是依涅槃而已经清凉的感受,却说“将在这里变清凉”。难道这里说的是感受,不是烦恼吗?即使说的是感受,也是因为没有烦恼才变清凉;否则,它们就没有所谓的清凉可言。这话说得很好。巴利
364.Visaṃyutto naṃ vedetīti sace hissa sukhavedanaṃ ārabbha rāgānusayo, dukkhavedanaṃ ārabbha paṭighānusayo, itaraṃ ārabbha avijjānusayo uppajjeyya, saṃyutto vediyeyya nāma. Anuppajjanato pana visaṃyutto naṃ vedeti nissaṭo vippamutto. Kāyapariyantikanti kāyakoṭikaṃ. Yāva kāyapavattā uppajjitvā tato paraṃ anuppajjanavedananti attho. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Anabhinanditāni sītībhavissantīti dvādasasu āyatanesu kilesānaṃ visevanassa natthitāya anabhinanditāni hutvā idha dvādasasuyeva āyatanesu nirujjhissanti. Kilesā hi nibbānaṃ āgamma niruddhāpi yattha natthi, tattha niruddhāti vuccanti. Svāyamattho – ‘‘etthesā taṇhā nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti samudayapañhena dīpetabbo. Tasmā bhagavā nibbānaṃ āgamma sītibhūtānipi idheva sītībhavissantīti āha. Nanu ca idha vedayitāni vuttāni, na kilesāti. Vedayitānipi kilesābhāveneva sītībhavanti. Itarathā nesaṃ sītibhāvo nāma natthīti suvuttametaṃ.
365 “正是这样”这句话,这里是用譬喻来对应说明:比如有一个人,油灯正在燃烧,油烧尽了就添油,灯芯烧尽了就换灯芯,这样灯焰就持续不断。同样地,凡夫停留在某一种生命状态中,造作善业和不善业,因此就不断投生到善趣和恶趣中去,感受也就持续不断。又比如有人对灯焰感到厌烦,心想:“就是因为有这个人,灯焰才不熄灭。”于是躲起来,把那个人的头砍掉。这样一来,没有人再添灯芯和油,灯焰因为没有燃料就熄灭了。同样地,对轮回感到厌烦的修行者,用阿拉汉道断除了善业和不善业;因为已经断除的缘故,漏尽比丘在身体坏灭之后,感受就不再产生了。巴利
365.Evamevakhoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – yathā hi eko puriso telapadīpassa jhāyato tele khīṇe telaṃ āsiñcati, vaṭṭiyā khīṇāya vaṭṭiṃ pakkhipati, evaṃ dīpasikhāya anupacchedova hoti, evameva puthujjano ekasmiṃ bhave ṭhito kusalākusalaṃ karoti, so tena sugatiyañca apāyesu ca nibbattatiyeva, evaṃ vedanānaṃ anupacchedova hoti. Yathā paneko dīpasikhāya ukkaṇṭhito – ‘‘imaṃ purisaṃ āgamma dīpasikhā na upacchijjatī’’ti nilīno tassa purisassa sīsaṃ chindeyya, evaṃ vaṭṭiyā ca telassa ca anupahārā dīpasikhā anāhārā nibbāyati, evameva vaṭṭe ukkaṇṭhito yogāvacaro arahattamaggena kusalākusalaṃ samucchindati, tassa samucchinnattā khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno kāyassa bhedā puna vedayitāni na uppajjantīti.
所谓“因此”,是因为在最初阶段,比起定与观的智慧,阿拉汉果的智慧更为超胜,所以这样说。“成就如此”是指:他具备了这种最上的、以阿拉汉果智慧为依止的成就。“一切苦灭尽智”指的是阿拉汉道中的智,但在这部经里,指的是阿拉汉果智。因此他说:“他的那种解脱,安住于谛,不可动摇。”巴利
Tasmāti yasmā ādimhi samādhivipassanāpaññāhi arahattaphalapaññā uttaritarā, tasmā. Evaṃ samannāgatoti iminā uttamena arahattaphalapaññādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato. Sabbadukkhakkhayeñāṇaṃ nāma arahattamagge ñāṇaṃ, imasmiṃ pana sutte arahattaphale ñāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tenevāha tassa sā vimutti sacce ṭhitā akuppā hotīti.
366 在这里,“解脱”指的是阿拉汉果的解脱,“真实”指的是究竟真实——涅槃。因此,由于作成以不可动摇者为所缘,所以称为“不可动摇”。“虚妄”就是不真实。“虚妄法”是指具有坏灭性质。“那真实”就是指那不虚妄的自性。“非虚妄法”是指没有坏灭性质。巴利
366. Ettha hi vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti, saccanti paramatthasaccaṃ nibbānaṃ. Iti akuppārammaṇakaraṇena akuppāti vuttā. Musāti vitathaṃ. Mosadhammanti nassanasabhāvaṃ. Taṃ saccanti taṃ avitathaṃ sabhāvo. Amosadhammanti anassanasabhāvaṃ.
先说“因此”一词的理由,是因为:从一开始,凭止观之力,究竟真实——涅槃,比言说真实(世俗谛)以及苦谛、集谛更为超胜,所以说“因此”。“如此具足”的意思是:具足了这最上的、以究竟真实为依止。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā ādito samathavipassanāvasena vacīsaccato dukkhasaccasamudayasaccehi ca paramatthasaccaṃ nibbānameva uttaritaraṃ, tasmā. Evaṃ samannāgatoti iminā uttamena paramatthasaccādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato.
367 “过去”是指在凡夫时期。“依着”是指这些依着:蕴依着、烦恼依着、行依着、五欲依着——这些就是依着。“已完全受持”是指圆满、已执取、已把握。“因此”是说:因为最初以止观的力量舍断烦恼,又通过入流道等舍断烦恼,而只有以阿拉汉道舍断烦恼才是最为超胜的,所以说“因此”。“如此具足”是指以这最上的舍断为立足处而具足。巴利
367.Pubbeti puthujjanakāle. Upadhīhontīti khandhūpadhi kilesūpadhi abhisaṅkhārūpadhi pañcakāmaguṇūpadhīti ime upadhayo honti. Samattā samādinnāti paripūrā gahitā paramaṭṭhā. Tasmāti yasmā ādito samathavipassanāvasena kilesapariccāgato, sotāpattimaggādīhi ca kilesapariccāgato arahattamaggeneva kilesapariccāgo uttaritaro, tasmā. Evaṃ samannāgatoti iminā uttamena cāgādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato.
368 在“嗔害”等词中:以造成嗔害的行为称为嗔害,以恼害的行为称为恼害,以完全腐坏的行为称为完全腐坏——这三个词所说的就是嗔不善根。“因此”一词是说:烦恼的止息,起初是依止观而止息,又依入流道等而止息,而唯有依阿拉汉道来止息烦恼才最为殊胜,所以这么说,即“因此”。所谓“如此具足”,就是以这种最殊胜的寂静为立足处而具足。巴利
368.Āghātotiādīsu āghātakaraṇavasena āghāto, byāpajjanavasena byāpādo, sampadussanavasena sampadosoti tīhi padehi dosākusalamūlameva vuttaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā ādito samathavipassanāvasena kilesavūpasamato, sotāpattimaggādīhi kilesavūpasamato ca arahattamaggeneva kilesavūpasamo uttaritaro, tasmā. Evaṃ samannāgatoti iminā uttamena upasamādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato.
369 “这些是妄想”:这可以指三种妄想——渴爱妄想、慢妄想、见妄想,三种都说得通。但在“此是我”这一句里,只取一种,也就是渴爱妄想。“病”等词中,以逼迫之义为病,以内在腐坏之义为疮,以刺入之义为箭。“牟尼已寂静,被称为”:漏尽的牟尼被称为寂静、已般涅槃。“住于何处”:即安住在某个地方。“以略说”:据说诸佛的一切说法都是略说,并没有所谓的广说,《发趣大论》也是略说。就这样,世尊把开示连贯地引到了相应的脉络上。再者,在“略说即悟者”等四种人当中,布咕萨提良家子属于“广解知者”,因此世尊是依广解知者而讲说了这部《界分别经》。巴利
369.Maññitametanti taṇhāmaññitaṃ mānamaññitaṃ diṭṭhimaññitanti tividhampi vaṭṭati. Ayamahamasmīti ettha pana ayamahanti ekaṃ taṇhāmaññitameva vaṭṭati. Rogotiādīsu ābādhaṭṭhena rogo, antodosaṭṭhena gaṇḍo, anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhena sallaṃ. Muni santoti vuccatīti khīṇāsavamuni santo nibbutoti vuccati. Yattha ṭhitanti yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitaṃ. Saṃkhittenāti buddhānaṃ kira sabbāpi dhammadesanā saṃkhittāva, vitthāradesanā nāma natthi, samantapaṭṭhānakathāpi saṃkhittāyeva. Iti bhagavā desanaṃ yathānusandhiṃ pāpesi. Ugghāṭitaññūtiādīsu pana catūsu puggalesu pukkusāti kulaputto vipañcitaññū, iti vipañcitaññuvasena bhagavā imaṃ dhātuvibhaṅgasuttaṃ kathesi.
370 “尊者,我的钵和衣还没有具足。”为什么这位良家子没有生出神通所成的钵和衣呢?因为过去没有布施八种资具。不过,这位良家子确实做过布施、发过愿,所以不能说“因为没有布施”。然而,神通所成的钵和衣只会出现在最后一生的人身上,而这位还要再受生,所以没有生出来。那么,世尊为什么不亲自去找来钵和衣,让他受具足戒呢?因为没有合适的时机。这位良家子的寿命已经尽了,就像一位住在净居天的不来果大梵天王来到陶匠屋里坐着一样。所以,世尊没有亲自去找。巴利
370.Na kho me, bhante, paripuṇṇaṃ pattacīvaranti kasmā kulaputtassa iddhimayapattacīvaraṃ na nibbattanti. Pubbe aṭṭhannaṃ parikkhārānaṃ adinnattā. Kulaputto hi dinnadāno katābhinīhāro, na dinnattāti na vattabbaṃ. Iddhimayapattacīvaraṃ pana pacchimabhavikānaṃyeva nibbattati, ayañca punapaṭisandhiko, tasmā na nibbattanti. Atha bhagavā sayaṃ pariyesitvā kasmā na upasampādesīti. Okāsābhāvato. Kulaputtassa āyu parikkhīṇaṃ, suddhāvāsiko anāgāmī mahābrahmā kumbhakārasālaṃ āgantvā nisinno viya ahosi. Tasmā sayaṃ na pariyesi.
他出去寻找钵和袈裟是在什么时候?是在日出的时候。据说,世尊说法结束、太阳升起和放出光芒,这三件事发生在同一个刹那。据说,世尊刚说完法就放出六色光芒,整座陶匠的住处顿时一片明亮,六色光芒像网一样交织、像团一样聚集,四处奔流,照遍各个方向,就像裹上了金布一样,又像各色花朵与宝珠的光泽同时绽放那样绚烂。世尊决意:让城里的人看见我。城里的人一见到世尊,就互相转告说:听说导师来了,正坐在陶匠的屋子里呢。然后他们去禀告了国王。巴利
Pattacīvarapariyesanaṃ pakkāmīti kāya velāya pakkāmi? Uṭṭhite aruṇe. Bhagavato kira dhammadesanāpariniṭṭhānañca aruṇuṭṭhānañca rasmivissajjanañca ekakkhaṇe ahosi. Bhagavā kira desanaṃ niṭṭhapetvāva chabbaṇṇarasmiyo vissajji, sakalakumbhakāranivesanaṃ ekapajjotaṃ ahosi, chabbaṇṇarasmiyo jālajālā puñjapuñjā hutvā vidhāvantiyo sabbadisābhāge suvaṇṇapaṭapariyonaddhe viya ca nānāvaṇṇakusumaratanavisarasamujjale viya ca akaṃsu. Bhagavā ‘‘nagaravāsino maṃ passantū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Nagaravāsino bhagavantaṃ disvāva ‘‘satthā kira āgato, kumbhakārasālāya kira nisinno’’ti aññamaññassa ārocetvā rañño ārocesuṃ.
国王来了以后,先礼敬导师,然后问:“尊者,您是什么时候来的?”回答说:“大王,是昨天日落的时候。”又问:“世尊是因为什么事来的?”回答说:“你们的朋友布咕萨提王,听了你们派人送去的消息,就离家出家,一心以我为目标而来。他越过舍卫城,走了四十五由旬,来到这里,进了这座陶匠屋坐下。我为了摄受他而过来,为他说法,这位良家子已经证得三果,大王。”又问:“尊者,他现在在哪里?”回答说:“他请求受达上,但因为钵和衣还不齐全,就出去寻找钵和衣了,大王。”国王便朝着那位良家子离去的方向走去。世尊也从空中而来,直接出现在祇园香室。巴利
Rājā āgantvā satthāraṃ vanditvā, ‘‘bhante, kāya velāya āgatatthā’’ti pucchi. Hiyyo sūriyatthaṅgamanavelāya mahārājāti. Kena kammena bhagavāti? Tumhākaṃ sahāyo pukkusāti rājā tumhehi pahitaṃ sāsanaṃ sutvā nikkhamitvā pabbajitvā maṃ uddissa āgacchanto sāvatthiṃ atikkamma pañcacattālīsa yojanāni āgantvā imaṃ kumbhakārasālaṃ pavisitvā nisīdi, ahaṃ tassa saṅgahatthaṃ āgantvā dhammakathaṃ kathesiṃ, kulaputto tīṇi phalāni paṭivijjhi mahārājāti. Idāni kahaṃ, bhanteti? Upasampadaṃ yācitvā aparipuṇṇapattacīvaratāya pattacīvarapariyesanatthaṃ gato mahārājāti. Rājā kulaputtassa gatadisābhāgena agamāsi. Bhagavāpi ākāsenāgantvā jetavanagandhakuṭimhiyeva pāturahosi.
善男子在寻找钵和袈裟时,既没有去频婆娑罗王那里,也没有去塔迦尸罗的商队那里。据说他心里这样想:我不该像鸡一样,到处挑挑拣拣,只找合意的、避开不合意的,然后再去找钵和袈裟。我应该避开大城,到渡口、坟场、垃圾堆之间的小巷里去寻找。于是他先在小巷里的垃圾堆中开始寻找布片。巴利
Kulaputtopi pattacīvaraṃ pariyesamāno neva bimbisārarañño na takkasīlakānaṃ jaṅghavāṇijānaṃ santikaṃ agamāsi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘na kho me kukkuṭassa viya tattha tattha manāpāmanāpameva vicinitvā pattacīvaraṃ pariyesituṃ yuttaṃ, mahantaṃ nagaraṃ vajjitvā udakatitthasusānasaṅkāraṭṭhānaantaravīthīsu pariyesissāmī’’ti antaravīthiyaṃ saṅkārakūṭesu tāva pilotikaṃ pariyesituṃ āraddho.
“夺去了生命”:当他正盯着这垃圾堆上的破布看时,一头受惊的带犊母牛冲过来,用角顶死了他。这位良家子饿得发慌,就在半空中寿命耗尽,坠落下来。他头朝下栽在垃圾堆上,像一尊倒放的金像。命终之后,他投生到无热梵天界,刚一结生就证得了阿拉汉果。据说在无热梵天界,刚结生就证得阿拉汉果的众生有七位。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Jīvitā voropesīti etasmiṃ saṅkārakūṭe pilotikaṃ olokentaṃ vibbhantā taruṇavacchā gāvī upadhāvitvā siṅgena vijjhitvā ghātesi. Chātakajjhatto kulaputto ākāseyeva āyukkhayaṃ patvā patito. Saṅkāraṭṭhāne adhomukhaṭṭhapitā suvaṇṇapaṭimā viya ahosi, kālaṅkato ca pana avihābrahmaloke nibbatti, nibbattamattova arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Avihābrahmaloke kira nibbattamattāva satta janā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 投生到无烦天的七位比丘,已经解脱。
他们已灭尽贪与嗔,超越了世间令人执着的粘着。
哪些人已经渡过了泥沼,越过了极难超越的死神领域?
哪些人舍弃了人身,又超越了天界的束缚?
伍巴咖、帕罗犍陀和布咕萨提这三位,
跋迪亚、犍陀提婆、巴胡拉吉和辛义尧,
他们舍弃了人身,就超越了天界的束缚。”巴利
‘‘Avihaṃ upapannāse, vimuttā satta bhikkhavo; Rāgadosaparikkhīṇā, tiṇṇā loke visattikaṃ. Ke ca te ataruṃ paṅkaṃ, maccudheyyaṃ suduttaraṃ; Ke hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, dibbayogaṃ upaccaguṃ. Upako palagaṇḍo ca, pukkusāti ca te tayo; Bhaddiyo khaṇḍadevo ca, bāhuraggi ca siṅgiyo; Te hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, dibbayogaṃ upaccagu’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.50, 105);
频婆娑罗王也想:“我的同伴只是读了我派人送去的教法书信,就舍弃了已经到手的王位,走了这么远的路来到这里。这位善男子做到了极难做到的事,我要以出家者应得的礼遇来礼敬他。”于是他到处派人去找:“去把我的同伴找出来。”被派去的人看见他倒在垃圾堆里,回去禀报了国王。国王亲自前去,见到那位善男子后说:“贤者们啊,我们终究没能来得及礼敬我的同伴,我的同伴如今落得这般孤苦无依。”国王悲叹之后,命人用担架抬起那位善男子,安置在合适的地方。因为不知道该如何礼敬尚未受具足戒的人,国王便召来浴仆、理发师等人,为那位善男子洗头,让他穿上洁净的衣服,以王家装束为他打扮,把他抬上金轿,用各种乐器、香料、花鬘等作供养,送出城去。又用许多香木堆起大柴堆,为那位善男子举行了遗体火化仪式,收取舍利后建塔供奉。其余各处都很清楚明白。巴利
Bimbisāropi ‘‘mayhaṃ sahāyo mayā pesitasāsanamattaṃ vācetvā hatthagataṃ rajjaṃ pahāya ettakaṃ addhānaṃ āgato, dukkaraṃ kataṃ kulaputtena, pabbajitasakkārena taṃ sakkarissāmī’’ti ‘‘pariyesatha me sahāyaka’’nti tattha tattha pesesi. Pesitā taṃ addasaṃsu saṅkāraṭṭhāne patitaṃ, disvā āgamma rañño ārocesuṃ. Rājā gantvā kulaputtaṃ disvā – ‘‘na vata, bho, labhimhā sahāyakassa sakkāraṃ kātuṃ, anātho me jāto sahāyako’’ti. Paridevitvā kulaputtaṃ mañcakena gaṇhāpetvā yuttokāse ṭhapetvā anupasampannassa sakkāraṃ kātuṃ jānanābhāvena nhāpakakappakādayo pakkosāpetvā kulaputtaṃ sīsaṃ nhāpetvā suddhavatthāni nivāsāpetvā rājavesena alaṅkārāpetvā sovaṇṇasivikaṃ āropetvā sabbatāḷāvacaragandhamālādīhi pūjaṃ karonto nagarā nīharitvā bahūhi gandhakaṭṭhehi mahācitakaṃ kāretvā kulaputtassa sarīrakiccaṃ katvā dhātuyo ādāya cetiyaṃ patiṭṭhapesi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
11. 《谛分别经》的注释巴利
11. Saccavibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
371 “如是我闻”开头的这部经,就是《谛分别经》。其中,“宣说”是指:这称为苦圣谛……乃至……这称为导向苦灭之道圣谛。其余语句也按同样方式理解。此外,这里的“施设”是指安立苦谛等;就像安置座位时,就说“施设座位”。“建立”就是施设。“开显”是令其显露。“分别”是加以区分的动作。“令明了”则是使其变得明显清晰。巴利
371.Evaṃme sutanti saccavibhaṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha ācikkhanāti idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ nāma…pe… ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṃ nāmāti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Apicettha paññāpanā nāma dukkhasaccādīnaṃ ṭhapanā. Āsanaṃ ṭhapento hi āsanaṃ paññapetīti vuccati. Paṭṭhapanāti paññāpanā. Vivaraṇāti vivaṭakaraṇā. Vibhajanāti vibhāgakiriyā. Uttānīkammanti pākaṭabhāvakaraṇaṃ.
帮助者:是指以财物摄受和法摄受这两种摄受来帮助他人。生育者:就是生母。养育者:就是抚养的人。这是用来说明目犍连就像养母一样。因为生母在九个月或十个月里,避开咸酸等食物,把孩子怀在腹中,等孩子从腹中出来后,就把他交给养母,也就是乳母。乳母用乳汁、鲜奶油等食物喂养孩子,把他养大;孩子长大后,就能随心所欲地到处走动。同样地,舍利弗以这两种摄受摄受在自己或他人座下出家的人,照料病人,让他们修习业处。当他知道他们证得入流果,已经从恶趣的怖畏中解脱出来之后,就不再挂念他们,心想:“现在他们会靠自己的努力证得更高的道果。”然后就去教导其他新来的人。大目犍连也同样摄受在自己或他人座下出家的人,让他们修习业处,即使他们已经证得了下面三种果位,他也不会对他们产生不再挂念的想法。为什么呢?据说他这样想:世尊说过:“比丘们,正如哪怕一点点粪便也是臭的……乃至……一点点尿、唾液、脓、血也是臭的;同样地,比丘们,我不赞叹哪怕一点点‘有’,即使短到弹指之间也不赞叹。”所以,只要他们还没有证得阿拉汉果,他就不会对他们产生不再挂念的想法,只有当他们证得阿拉汉果时,才会不再挂念。因此世尊说:“比丘们,舍利弗就像生育者,目犍连就像养育者。比丘们,舍利弗引导人证得入流果,目犍连引导人证得最高的利益。”有能力:就是能够。巴利
Anuggāhakāti āmisasaṅgahena dhammasaṅgahenāti dvīhipi saṅgahehi anuggāhakā. Janetāti janikā mātā. Āpādetāti posetā. Posikamātā viya moggallānoti dīpeti. Janikamātā hi nava vā dasa vā māse loṇambilādīni pariharamānā kucchiyā dārakaṃ dhāretvā kucchito nikkhantaṃ posikamātaraṃ dhātiṃ paṭicchāpeti. Sā khīranavanītādīhi dārakaṃ posetvā vaḍḍheti, so vuddhimāgamma yathāsukhaṃ vicarati. Evameva sāriputto attano vā paresaṃ vā santike pabbajite dvīhi saṅgahehi saṅgaṇhanto gilāne paṭijagganto kammaṭṭhāne yojetvā sotāpannabhāvaṃ ñatvā apāyabhayehi vuṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya – ‘‘idāni paccattapurisakārena uparimagge nibbattessantī’’ti tesu anapekkho hutvā aññe nave nave ovadati. Mahāmoggallānopi attano vā paresaṃ vā santike pabbajite tatheva saṅgaṇhitvā kammaṭṭhāne yojetvā heṭṭhā tīṇi phalāni pattesupi anapekkhataṃ na āpajjati. Kasmā? Evaṃ kirassa hoti – vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, appamattakopi gūtho duggandho hoti…pe… appamattakampi muttaṃ… kheḷo… pubbo… lohitaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, evameva kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, appamattakampi bhavaṃ na vaṇṇemi antamaso accharāsaṅghatamattampī’’ti (a. ni. 1.320-321). Tasmā yāva arahattaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva tesu anapekkhataṃ anāpajjitvā arahattaṃ pattesuyeva āpajjatīti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, janetā evaṃ sāriputto. Seyyathāpi jātassa āpādetā, evaṃ moggallāno. Sāriputto, bhikkhave, sotāpattiphale vineti, moggallāno uttamatthe’’ti. Pahotīti sakkoti.
“苦智”是指闻所成、思所成和通达的智慧;在“苦集”上也是这样。在“苦灭”上,说成闻所成和通达的智慧才合适;在“导向苦灭的道”上也是这样。在出离思惟等当中,因为它的作用是对抗欲贪,或者因为它是从欲中脱离的状态,或者因为它是思惟欲的人所生起的,或者因为它是击破欲、止息欲时所生起的,或者因为它是远离欲之后生起的,所以称为“出离思惟”。其余两个词——无恚思惟、无害思惟——也是同样的道理。所有这些在道的预备阶段,都是在不同的心中生起;在道的那一刹那,则在同一个心中生起。因为在那时,只有一个能彻底断除邪思惟和思心所的正思惟生起,并不是有多个不同的思惟生起。正语等也是如此:在预备阶段,在不同的心中生起;按照前面所说的道理,在道的那一刹那,则在同一个心中生起。这是此处的简要说明;详细的内容,在《清净道论》和《正见经》等当中已经说过了。巴利
Dukkheñāṇanti savanasammasanapaṭivedhañāṇaṃ, tathā dukkhasamudaye. Dukkhanirodhe savanapaṭivedhañāṇanti vaṭṭati, tathā dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya. Nekkhammasaṅkappādīsu kāmapaccanīkaṭṭhena, kāmato nissaṭabhāvena vā, kāmaṃ sammasantassa uppannoti vā, kāmapadaghātaṃ kāmavūpasamaṃ karonto uppannoti vā, kāmavivittante uppannoti vā nekkhammasaṅkappo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Sabbepi cete pubbabhāge nānācittesu, maggakkhaṇe ekacitte labbhanti. Tatra hi micchāsaṅkappacetanāya samugghātako ekova saṅkappo labbhati, na nānā labbhati . Sammāvācādayopi pubbabhāge nānācittesu, vuttanayeneva maggakkhaṇe ekacitte labbhanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārena pana saccakathā visuddhimagge ca sammādiṭṭhisutte (ma. ni. 1.89 ādayo) ca vuttāyevāti.
12. 布施分别经的注释巴利
12. Dakkhiṇāvibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
376 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《布施分别经》。其中,“大爱道·果达弥”里的“果达弥”是族姓。在她命名那天,被请来的婆罗门们看到她的相好圆满,就预言说:“如果这个女孩将来生的是女儿,女儿会成为转轮王的王后;如果生的是儿子,儿子会成为转轮王。不管怎样,她的后代都会很广大。”于是给她取名叫“大爱道”。这里是把名字和族姓连在一起,所以称作“大爱道·果达弥”。“新”是指没有用过、新做出来的。“亲手织”并不是说她真的亲手织,而是有一天,她在一群乳母的围绕下来到织工织布的地方,抓住经线的一端,做出织布的样子。这段话指的就是那件事。巴利
376.Evaṃme sutanti dakkhiṇāvibhaṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha mahāpajāpati gotamīti gotamīti gottaṃ. Nāmakaraṇadivase panassā laddhasakkārā brāhmaṇā lakkhaṇasampattiṃ disvā – ‘‘sace ayaṃ dhītaraṃ labhissati, cakkavattirañño aggamahesī bhavissati. Sace puttaṃ labhissati, cakkavattirājā bhavissatīti ubhayathāpi mahatīyevassā pajā bhavissatī’’ti byākariṃsu. Athassā mahāpajāpatīti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Idha pana gottena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā mahāpajāpatigotamīti vuttaṃ. Navanti ahataṃ. Sāmaṃ vāyitanti na sahattheneva vāyitaṃ, ekadivasaṃ pana dhātigaṇaparivutā sippikānaṃ vāyanaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā vemakoṭiṃ gahetvā vāyanākāraṃ akāsi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
那么,大爱道是什么时候生起想供养世尊一套衣料的心呢?是在世尊证得正自觉后,第一次回到迦毗罗卫城的时候。那时,苏托达那王把正在城中乞食的世尊迎请到自己的王宫里。大爱道看到世尊的容貌这样庄严,心里想:“我儿子的身相真是光彩照人啊!”于是生起强烈的欢喜。接着她又想:“我儿子在俗家生活了二十九年,哪怕是一个香蕉那么小的东西,也都是我给的。现在我要供养他一套衣料。”她又想:“这王宫里虽然有很多名贵的布料,但那些都不能让我满意;只有我亲手做的才能让我满意。我要亲手做好再供养。”于是生起了这样的心念。巴利
Kadā pana gotamiyā bhagavato dussayugaṃ dātuṃ cittaṃ uppannanti. Abhisambodhiṃ patvā paṭhamagamanena kapilapuraṃ āgatakāle. Tadā hi piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ satthāraṃ gahetvā suddhodanamahārājā sakaṃ nivesanaṃ pavesesi, atha bhagavato rūpasobhaggaṃ disvā mahāpajāpatigotamī cintesi – ‘‘sobhati vata me puttassa attabhāvo’’ti. Athassā balavasomanassaṃ uppajji. Tato cintesi – ‘‘mama puttassa ekūnatiṃsa vassāni agāramajjhe vasantassa antamaso mocaphalamattampi mayā dinnakameva ahosi, idānipissa cīvarasāṭakaṃ dassāmī’’ti. ‘‘Imasmiṃ kho pana rājagehe bahūni mahagghāni vatthāni atthi, tāni maṃ na tosenti, sahatthā katameva maṃ toseti, sahatthā katvā dassāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādesi.
于是她从市场取来棉花,亲手剥开、弹松,纺成细线,就在王宫里面让人织成布,又召来织工,把自己吃的嚼食和啖食给他们,让他们织。她也时常在一群乳母的陪伴下前去,握住织机的末端。织成之后,她给了织工们隆重的供养,把两件布料放进香盒里熏香,然后禀告国王:“我要拿着给我儿子的衣料去了。”国王便命人准备道路,打扫街道,摆上满水罐,竖起幢幡,从王宫大门一直到尼拘律园,铺好了路,又撒满鲜花。大爱道也佩戴上所有饰物,由一群乳母簇拥着,把香盒顶在头上,来到世尊面前,说道:“尊者,这是我新织成的两件布料……”等等。巴利
Athantarāpaṇā kappāsaṃ āharāpetvā sahattheneva pisitvā pothetvā sukhumasuttaṃ kantitvā antovatthusmiṃyeva sālaṃ kārāpetvā sippike pakkosāpetvā sippikānaṃ attano paribhogakhādanīyabhojanīyameva datvā vāyāpesi, kālānukālañca dhātigaṇaparivutā gantvā vemakoṭiṃ aggahesi. Niṭṭhitakāle sippikānaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ katvā dussayugaṃ gandhasamugge pakkhipitvā vāsaṃ gāhāpetvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ puttassa cīvarasāṭakaṃ gahetvā gamissāmī’’ti rañño ārocesi . Rājā maggaṃ paṭiyādāpesi, vīthiyo sammajjitvā puṇṇaghaṭe ṭhapetvā dhajapaṭākā ussāpetvā rājagharadvārato paṭṭhāya yāva nigrodhārāmā maggaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā pupphābhikiṇṇaṃ akaṃsu. Mahāpajāpatipi sabbālaṅkāraṃ alaṅkaritvā dhātigaṇaparivutā samuggaṃ sīse ṭhapetvā bhagavato santikaṃ gantvā idaṃ me, bhante, navaṃ dussayugantiādimāha.
第二次,当世尊说“果达弥,布施给僧团吧”时,她请求道:“尊者,我完全有能力从库房里拿出布料,布施给一百位比丘、一千位比丘、十万位比丘。但这一件,是我特意为世尊亲手纺、亲手织的。尊者,请世尊接受它吧。”她这样请求了三次,世尊仍然拒绝了。巴利
Dutiyampi khoti ‘‘saṅghe gotami dehī’’ti vutte – ‘‘pahomahaṃ, bhante, dussakoṭṭhāgārato bhikkhusatassāpi bhikkhusahassassāpi bhikkhusatasahassassāpi cīvaradussāni dātuṃ, idaṃ pana me bhagavantaṃ uddissa sāmaṃ kantaṃ sāmaṃ vāyitaṃ, taṃ me, bhante, bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātū’’ti nimantayamānā āha. Evaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ yāci, bhagavāpi paṭikkhipiyeva.
那么,世尊为什么要把别人供养给自己的东西,让人转交给比丘僧团呢?是出于对母亲的悲悯。据说他当时这样想:“她因为我,已经生起了前思、脱思、后思这三种思。现在让她也因为僧团而生起这些思吧。这样,她的六种思就合在一起,能长久地给她带来利益和安乐。”但是有个诡辩派的人说:“因为供养僧团的果报更大,所以世尊才这么说。”应该这样回他:“你是说,供养僧团的果报比供养世尊本人还大吗?”他若答“是”,就问他:“有经证吗?”他可能会引经说:“果达弥,供养僧团吧。你供养了僧团,就等于供养了我,也供养了僧团。”再问他:“这部经的意思就是这个吗?”他答:“正是这个意思。”如果是这样,那么按照“阿难,把残食给那些吃残食的人吧”以及“迦旃延,把糖块给那些吃残食的人吧”这些说法,供养吃残食的人果报反而应该更大了。照这样推,世尊把自己该得的供养转给别人,就像国王、大臣等人把自己收到的礼物转送给象夫之类的人,那这些接受转送的人岂不比国王等人更尊贵了?所以,不应该这样理解。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā attano diyyamānaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa dāpetīti? Mātari anukampāya. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘imissā maṃ ārabbha pubbacetanā muñcacetanā paracetanāti tisso cetanā uppannā, bhikkhusaṅghampissā ārabbha uppajjantu, evamassā cha cetanā ekato hutvā dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya pavattissantī’’ti. Vitaṇḍavādī panāha – ‘‘saṅghe dinnaṃ mahapphalanti tasmā evaṃ vutta’’nti. So vattabbo – ‘‘kiṃ tvaṃ satthu dinnato saṅghe dinnaṃ mahapphalataraṃ vadasī’’ti āma vadāmīti. Suttaṃ āharāti. Saṅghe gotami dehi, saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cāti. Kiṃ panassa suttassa ayameva atthoti ? Āma ayamevāti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tena hānanda, vighāsādānaṃ pūvaṃ dehī’’ti ca (pāci. 269) ‘‘tena hi tva, kaccāna, vighāsādānaṃ guḷaṃ dehī’’ti (mahāva. 284) ca vacanato vighāsādānaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalatarañca bhaveyya. Evampi hi ‘‘satthā attano diyyamānaṃ dāpetī’’ti. Rājarājamahāmattādayopi attano āgataṃ paṇṇākāraṃ hatthigopakādīnaṃ dāpenti, te rājādīhi mahantatarā bhaveyyuṃ. Tasmā mā evaṃ gaṇha –
“ 于此世间或他方世界,
皆无胜过佛陀者,亦无与佛相等之人。
为求福德、希求广大果报之人,
他已登上应受供养者中的最上首位。”巴利
‘‘Nayimasmiṃ loke parasmiṃ vā pana, Buddhena seṭṭho sadiso vā vijjati; Yamāhuneyyānamaggataṃ gato, Puññatthikānaṃ vipulaphalesina’’nti. –
按他的原话,确实没有比导师更值得供养的人。这样一来,她的思合在一起,就能长久地带来利益和安乐。正是出于这个用意,世尊三次拒绝后,让她把供养献给了僧团。巴利
Vacanato hi satthārā uttaritaro dakkhiṇeyyo nāma natthi. Evamassā cha cetanā ekato hutvā dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissantīti sandhāya yāvatatiyaṃ paṭibāhitvā saṅghassa dāpesi.
世尊这样说,也是为了令后世的众生对僧团生起恭敬心。据说他心里这样想:“我不会久住于世,而我的教法将会在比丘僧团中安立下来,愿后世的众生对僧团生起恭敬。”因此,他三次拒绝了她的供养之后,让她把供养献给了僧团。这样一来,后世的众生就会想:“导师连别人献给自己应得的供养都让给了僧团,僧团确实是值得供养的对象。”于是对僧团生起恭敬心,认为应当供养四种资具。僧团因为得到四种资具而不致疲于奔命,就能学习佛陀的教法,修行沙门之法。这样,我的教法就能住世五千年。从“请世尊接受,尊者”这句话也可以知道,没有比导师更值得供养的人了。因为阿难长老对大爱道并没有怨恨或敌意。长老并不是希望她的供养没有大果报。长老是智者、多闻、证得无碍解的有学圣者,他正是因为看到供养佛陀有大果报,才请求说“请世尊接受,尊者”,目的是让世尊接受供养。巴利
Pacchimāya janatāya saṅghe cittīkārajananatthaṃ cāpi evamāha. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ na ciraṭṭhitiko, mayhaṃ pana sāsanaṃ bhikkhusaṅghe patiṭṭhahissati, pacchimā janatā saṅghe cittīkāraṃ janetū’’ti yāvatatiyaṃ paṭibāhitvā saṅghassa dāpesi. Evañhi sati – ‘‘satthā attano diyyamānampi saṅghassa dāpesi, saṅgho nāma dakkhiṇeyyo’’ti pacchimā janatā saṅghe cittīkāraṃ uppādetvā cattāro paccaye dātabbe maññissati, saṅgho catūhi paccayehi akilamanto buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā samaṇadhammaṃ karissati. Evaṃ mama sāsanaṃ pañca vassasahassāni ṭhassatīti. ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā’’ti vacanatopi cetaṃ veditabbaṃ ‘‘satthārā uttaritaro dakkhiṇeyyo nāma natthī’’ti. Na hi ānandattherassa mahāpajāpatiyā āghāto vā veraṃ vā atthi. Na thero – ‘‘tassā dakkhiṇā mā mahapphalā ahosī’’ti icchati. Paṇḍito hi thero bahussuto sekkhapaṭisambhidāpatto , so satthu dinnassa mahapphalabhāve sampassamānova paṭiggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavāti gahaṇatthaṃ yāci.
又有诡辩派的人说:因为诡辩派有“若把供养施给僧团,那么我和僧团都会受到供养”这句话,所以导师也属于僧团。应当这样反驳他:你知道有几种皈依、几种不坏净信吗?他若清楚,就会说有三种。接着再对他说:照你的见解,导师既然属于僧团,那就只剩两种了。若真是这样,世尊曾允许“诸比丘,我允许以这三种皈依出家、受达上”,那么这样被允许的出家与受达上就都站不住脚了。这样一来,你既不是出家人,也不是在家人。再者,当正自觉者坐在香室里时,比丘们照样举行伍波萨他、自恣和僧团甘马。如果导师属于僧团,这些活动就该被破坏,可它们并没有被破坏。所以,不能说“导师属于僧团”。巴利
Puna vitaṇḍavādī āha – ‘‘saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā’’ti vacanato satthā saṅghapariyāpanno vāti. So vattabbo – ‘‘jānāsi pana tvaṃ kati saraṇāni, kati aveccappasādā’’ti jānanto tīṇīti vakkhati, tato vattabbo – tava laddhiyā satthu saṅghapariyāpannattā dveyeva honti. Evaṃ sante ca – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi pabbajjaṃ upasampada’’nti (mahāva. 34) evaṃ anuññātā pabbajjāpi upasampadāpi na ruhati. Tato tvaṃ neva pabbajito asi, na gihi. Sammāsambuddhe ca gandhakuṭiyaṃ nisinne bhikkhū uposathampi pavāraṇampi saṅghakammānipi karonti, tāni satthu saṅghapariyāpannattā kuppāni bhaveyyuṃ, na ca honti. Tasmā na vattabbametaṃ ‘‘satthā saṅghapariyāpanno’’ti.
377 377.“养育者”:就是使你们成长的人。当你们的手脚还不能发挥手脚的作用时,她扶持你们的手脚、照料你们,这就是它的意思。“哺育者”:一天两三次为你们沐浴、喂食、饮水,把你们养育大。“给予乳汁”:据说难陀王子只比菩萨晚出生几天,他出生后,大爱道把自己的儿子交给乳母,亲自承担起做菩萨乳母的职责,用自己的乳汁哺育菩萨。长老就是针对这件事这样说的。这样讲了大爱道的大恩之后,现在为了说明如来也有大恩,长老接着说了“尊者,世尊也……”等话。其中,“尊者,由于世尊”的意思是:依靠、依止、针对世尊。巴利
377.Āpādikāti saṃvaḍḍhikā, tumhākaṃ hatthapādesu hatthapādakiccaṃ asādhentesu hatthe ca pāde ca vaḍḍhetvā paṭijaggikāti attho. Posikāti divasassa dve tayo vāre nhāpetvā bhojetvā pāyetvā tumhe posesi. Thaññaṃ pāyesīti nandakumāro kira bodhisattato katipāheneva daharo, tasmiṃ jāte mahāpajāpati attano puttaṃ dhātīnaṃ datvā sayaṃ bodhisattassa dhātikiccaṃ sādhayamānā attano thaññaṃ pāyesi. Taṃ sandhāya thero evamāha. Iti mahāpajāpatiyā bahūpakārataṃ kathetvā idāni tathāgatassa bahūpakārataṃ dassento bhagavāpi, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha bhagavantaṃ, bhante, āgammāti bhagavantaṃ paṭicca nissāya sandhāya.
378 这时,世尊为了随喜两种恩德中更殊胜的那一种,说出了“确实,阿难……”等话。其中,“阿难,若人依于人”,是指弟子依于作为师长的人。“阿难,对此人,因此人”,是指对这位师长,由于这个弟子。“我说不易报答”,意思是说要做出相应的回报并不容易。在敬礼等行为中,见到老师后行礼,这叫“敬礼”。又或者,老师无论住在哪一方,行住坐卧时都朝那个方向礼拜,然后才走、才坐、才躺下;而远远看到老师就起身、上前迎接,这叫“起迎”。见到老师后合掌举到头顶向老师致敬,或者无论老师住在哪个方向,都面向那个方向同样致敬,走路时、站着时、坐着时都合掌致敬,这叫“合掌”。做与身份相应的事,这叫“如法恭敬”。在衣服等物品方面,送衣服时不是随便给什么,而是即使价值百金、五百金、千金也照样送。在饮食等方面也是如此。何必多说呢,即使用四种精美供品填满整个宇宙,再用须弥山压住顶端拿来布施,也仍然无法对老师做出与身份相应的侍奉。巴利
378. Atha bhagavā dvīsu upakāresu atirekataraṃ anumodanto evametantiādimāha. Tattha yaṃ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṃ āgammāti yaṃ ācariyapuggalaṃ antevāsikapuggalo āgamma. Imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalenāti imassa ācariyapuggalassa iminā antevāsikapuggalena. Na suppaṭikāraṃ vadāmīti paccūpakāraṃ na sukaraṃ vadāmi, abhivādanādīsu ācariyaṃ disvā abhivādanakaraṇaṃ abhivādanaṃ nāma. Yasmiṃ vā disābhāge ācariyo vasati, iriyāpathe vā kappento tadabhimukho vanditvā gacchati, vanditvā nisīdati, vanditvā nipajjati, ācariyaṃ pana dūratova disvā paccuṭṭhāya paccuggamanakaraṇaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ācariyaṃ pana disvā añjaliṃ paggayha sīse ṭhapetvā ācariyaṃ namassati, yasmiṃ vā disābhāge so vasati, tadabhimukhopi tatheva namassati, gacchantopi ṭhitopi nisinnopi añjaliṃ paggayha namassatiyevāti idaṃ añjalikammaṃ nāma. Anucchavikakammassa pana karaṇaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ nāma. Cīvarādīsu cīvaraṃ dento na yaṃ vā taṃ vā deti, mahagghaṃ satamūlikampi pañcasatamūlikampi sahassamūlikampi detiyeva . Piṇḍapātādīsupi eseva nayo. Kiṃ bahunā, catūhi paṇītapaccayehi cakkavāḷantaraṃ pūretvā sinerupabbatena kūṭaṃ gahetvā dentopi ācariyassa anucchavikaṃ kiriyaṃ kātuṃ na sakkotiyeva.
379 为什么开始讲“有十四种”呢?这段经文是针对个人供养而说的。阿难长老也劝请说“请世尊接受”,正是在劝请个人供养。为了说明在十四种情况下所做的布施就叫做个人供养,所以开始了这段开示。“这第一种”:这种供养无论从功德方面说还是从殊胜方面说都是第一。因为这是第一、最上、最殊胜的供养,这种供养没有限量。第二和第三种也同样是殊胜的供养,其余的则达不到殊胜供养的程度。“对外在的欲乐已经离贪的人”:指持业论、持行为论的人当中证得世间五种神通的人。“凡夫持戒者”:凡夫持戒者是指具有牛戒品性的人,也就是正直、不虚伪、不欺诈,不压迫他人,以合法公平的方式通过耕种或经商来维持生活的人。“凡夫破戒者”:凡夫破戒者,比如渔夫、捕鱼人等等,是靠压迫他人来维持生活的人。巴利
379.Cuddasa kho panimāti kasmā ārabhi? Idaṃ suttaṃ pāṭipuggalikaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ ārabbha samuṭṭhitaṃ. Ānandattheropi ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā’’ti pāṭipuggalikadakkhiṇaṃyeva samādapeti, cuddasasu ca ṭhānesu dinnadānaṃ pāṭipuggalikaṃ nāma hotīti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Ayaṃ paṭhamāti ayaṃ dakkhiṇā guṇavasenapi paṭhamā jeṭṭhakavasenapi. Ayañhi paṭhamā aggā jeṭṭhikā, imissā dakkhiṇāya pamāṇaṃ nāma natthi. Dutiyatatiyāpi paramadakkhiṇāyeva, sesā paramadakkhiṇabhāvaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Bāhirake kāmesu vītarāgeti kammavādikiriyavādimhi lokiyapañcābhiññe. Puthujjanasīlavanteti puthujjanasīlavā nāma gosīladhātuko hoti, asaṭho amāyāvī paraṃ apīḷetvā dhammena samena kasiyā vā vaṇijjāya vā jīvikaṃ kappetā. Puthujjanadussīleti puthujjanadussīlā nāma kevaṭṭamacchabandhādayo paraṃ pīḷāya jīvikaṃ kappetā.
现在,为了确定个人供养的果报,世尊开始说“在那里,阿难……”等话。其中,“畜生”是指:如果是因为看重对方的德行、为了帮助或养育它而布施,这种不算在内。即使只是布施一小团或半小团食物,也不算在内。但如果是对狗、猪、鸡、乌鸦等任何众生,怀着期待果报的心,随其所欲地给足食物,这才是针对这种情况而说的“布施给畜生”。百倍就是一百种功德利益。应当期待的就是可以希求的。这话的意思是:这种供养能带来寿命一百、容貌一百、快乐一百、力量一百、辩才一百这五种一百的功德;在一百次生命中,它赋予寿命,赋予容貌、快乐、力量、辩才,使之圆满无缺。即使说一百次生命,意思也是一样的。用这个方法,一切情况都应这样理解。巴利
Idāni pāṭipuggalikadakkhiṇāya vipākaṃ paricchindanto tatrānandātiādimāha. Tattha tiracchānagateti yaṃ guṇavasena upakāravasena posanatthaṃ dinnaṃ, idaṃ na gahitaṃ. Yampi ālopaaḍḍhaālopamattaṃ dinnaṃ, tampi na gahitaṃ. Yaṃ pana sunakhasūkarakukkuṭakākādīsu yassa kassaci sampattassa phalaṃ paṭikaṅkhitvā yāvadatthaṃ dinnaṃ, idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘tiracchānagate dānaṃ datvā’’ti. Sataguṇāti satānisaṃsā. Pāṭikaṅkhitabbāti icchitabbā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ayaṃ dakkhiṇā āyusataṃ vaṇṇasataṃ sukhasataṃ balasataṃ paṭibhānasatanti pañca ānisaṃsasatāni deti, attabhāvasate āyuṃ deti, vaṇṇaṃ, sukhaṃ, balaṃ, paṭibhānaṃ deti, nipparitasaṃ karoti. Bhavasatepi vutte ayameva attho. Iminā upāyena sabbattha nayo netabbo.
在“为现证入流果而修行”这句话里,从最低标准来说,已经皈依三宝的在家男信徒也算作“为现证入流果而修行”的人,对他所做的布施也是不可计算、不可衡量的。安住在五戒上的人,布施的果报比这更大;安住在十戒上的人,又更大;当天出家的沙弥,又更大;受具足戒的比丘,又更大;受具足戒且具足义务的比丘,又更大;修观的人,又更大;已开始修观的人,又更大。但从最高标准来说,具足道者才叫作“为现证入流果而修行”的人。对他所做的布施,果报比前面那些更大。巴利
Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanneti ettha heṭṭhimakoṭiyā tisaraṇaṃ gato upāsakopi sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno nāma, tasmiṃ dinnadānampi asaṅkhyeyyaṃ appameyyaṃ. Pañcasīle patiṭṭhitassa tato uttari mahapphalaṃ, dasasīle patiṭṭhitassa tato uttari, tadahupabbajitassa sāmaṇerassa tato uttari, upasampannabhikkhuno tato uttari, upasampannasseva vattasampannassa tato uttari, vipassakassa tato uttari, āraddhavipassakassa tato uttari, uttamakoṭiyā pana maggasamaṅgī sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno nāma. Etassa dinnadānaṃ tato uttari mahapphalameva.
那么,能不能布施给已经具足道的人呢?能。因为精进修观的人会拿着钵和袈裟进村乞食。当他站在人家门口时,有人从他手里接过钵,把嚼食和啖食放进去。就在那一刻,那位比丘生起了道,这份布施就叫作布施给具足道的人。或者,他正坐在食堂里,人们走过去把嚼食和啖食放进他的钵里,就在那一刻,他生起了道,这份布施也叫作布施给具足道的人。又或者,他坐在精舍或食堂里,近事男们拿了他的钵,回到自己家里,把嚼食和啖食装进去再送来,就在那一刻,他生起了道,这份布施同样叫作布施给具足道的人。在这里应当知道:布施给为证入流果而修行的人,功德不可计量,就像水沟里的水一样;而布施给入流者等更高圣者,功德按层级递增,不可计量,就像一条条大河乃至大海里的水一样。这个道理,也可以用从大地上取一指甲盖那么多的土,一直到整个大地的土都无法计量来说明。巴利
Kiṃ pana maggasamaṅgissa sakkā dānaṃ dātunti? Āma sakkā. Āraddhavipassako hi pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati, tassa gehadvāre ṭhitassa hatthato pattaṃ gahetvā khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ pakkhipanti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe bhikkhuno maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, idaṃ dānaṃ maggasamaṅgino dinnaṃ nāma hoti. Atha vā panesa āsanasālāya nisinno hoti, manussā gantvā patte khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ ṭhapenti, tasmiṃ khaṇe tassa maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, idampi dānaṃ maggasamaṅgino dinnaṃ nāma. Atha vā panassa vihāre vā āsanasālāya vā nisinnassa upāsakā pattaṃ ādāya attano gharaṃ gantvā khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ pakkhipanti, tasmiṃ khaṇe tassa maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, idampi dānaṃ maggasamaṅgino dinnaṃ nāma. Tattha soṇḍiyaṃ udakassa viya sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dinnadānassa asaṅkhyeyyatā veditabbā. Tāsu tāsu mahānadīsu mahāsamudde ca udakassa viya sotāpannādīsu dinnadānassa uttaritaravasena asaṅkhyeyyatā veditabbā. Pathaviyā khayamaṇḍalamatte padese paṃsuṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva mahāpathaviyā paṃsuno appameyyatāyapi ayamattho dīpetabbo.
380 为什么开始讲这“七种”呢?因为世尊曾经说过:“果达弥,你布施给僧团吧,布施给僧团的话,我和僧团都会受到恭敬。”为了说明在那七种处所中所布施之施名为施与僧团,所以开始了这段教导。其中,“以佛为上首的两众僧团”是指:一边是比丘僧团,一边是比丘尼僧团,导师坐在中间,这就叫以佛为上首的两众僧团。这第一种供养,没有任何供养能和它相比。第二种供养以及后面的其他供养,都比不上这最上的供养。巴利
380.Satta kho panimāti kasmā ārabhi? ‘‘Saṅghe gotami dehi, saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā’’ti hi vuttaṃ, tattha sattasu ṭhānesu dinnadānaṃ saṅghe dinnaṃ nāma hotīti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha buddhappamukhe ubhatosaṅgheti ekato bhikkhusaṅgho, ekato bhikkhunisaṅgho, satthā majjhe nisinno hotīti ayaṃ buddhappamukho ubhatosaṅgho nāma. Ayaṃ paṭhamāti imāya dakkhiṇāya samappamāṇā dakkhiṇā nāma natthi. Dutiyadakkhiṇādayo pana etaṃ paramadakkhiṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti.
那么,如来般涅槃之后,还能不能供养以佛为上首的两众僧团呢?能。怎么做呢?在两众僧团面前,把供有舍利的佛像安放在座位上,放好底座,从献净水开始,所有物品都先供养导师,然后再供养两众僧团,这样就算是供养了以佛为上首的两众僧团。其中,供养导师的那一份该怎么处理呢?应该给那位侍奉导师、具足行仪的比丘。因为父亲的财物归儿子所有,所以布施给比丘僧团也是可以的。不过,拿了酥油等物之后应该点燃灯,拿了布之后应该做成幢幡挂起来。所谓“比丘僧团”,是指没有限定范围的大比丘僧团。比丘尼僧团也是同样的道理。巴利
Kiṃ pana tathāgate parinibbute buddhappamukhassa ubhatosaṅghassa dānaṃ dātuṃ sakkāti? Sakkā. Kathaṃ? Ubhatosaṅghassa hi pamukhe sadhātukaṃ paṭimaṃ āsane ṭhapetvā ādhārakaṃ ṭhapetvā dakkhiṇodakaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbaṃ satthu paṭhamaṃ datvā ubhatosaṅghassa dātabbaṃ, evaṃ buddhappamukhassa ubhatosaṅghassa dānaṃ dinnaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha yaṃ satthu dinnaṃ, taṃ kiṃ kātabbanti? Yo satthāraṃ paṭijaggati vattasampanno bhikkhu, tassa dātabbaṃ. Pitusantakañhi puttassa pāpuṇāti, bhikkhusaṅghassa dātumpi vaṭṭati, sappitelāni pana gahetvā dīpā jalitabbā, sāṭakaṃ gahetvā paṭākā āropetabbāti. Bhikkhusaṅgheti aparicchinnakamahābhikkhusaṅghe. Bhikkhunisaṅghepi eseva nayo.
“种姓者”是指仅仅体验到种姓本身的人,意思是名义上的沙门。“袈裟缠颈者”就是被称为袈裟缠颈的人。据说他们会把一小块袈裟布绑在手上或脖子上到处走动。但他们的家门口,妻子儿女以及耕田经商等事务,都还是和普通人一样。对于这些无道德的人,如果指定僧团来布施,这里并没有说“无道德的僧团”,因为僧团本身不存在“无道德”这回事。只是那些无道德的在家人,以那些无道德的比丘为对象,心里想着“我们布施给僧团”而做布施。因此世尊说:在以佛为上首的僧团中所做的供养,以功德来算也是不可计算的;在袈裟缠颈那样的僧团中所做的供养,同样以功德来算也是不可计算的。因为能够对僧团生起恭敬心的人,他的供养才算是僧团供养;而对僧团生起恭敬心,是很难的。巴利
Gotrabhunoti gottamattakameva anubhavamānā, nāmamattasamaṇāti attho. Kāsāvakaṇṭhāti kāsāvakaṇṭhanāmakā. Te kira ekaṃ kāsāvakhaṇḍaṃ hatthe vā gīvāya vā bandhitvā vicarissanti . Gharadvāraṃ pana tesaṃ puttabhariyā kasivaṇijjādikammāni ca pākatikāneva bhavissanti. Tesu dussīlesu saṅghaṃ uddissa dānaṃ dassantīti ettha dussīlasaṅghanti na vuttaṃ. Saṅgho hi dussīlo nāma natthi. Dussīlā pana upāsakā tesu dussīlesu bhikkhusaṅghaṃ uddissa saṅghassa demāti dānaṃ dassanti. Iti bhagavatā buddhappamukhe saṅghe dinnadakkhiṇāpi guṇasaṅkhāya asaṅkhyeyyāti vuttaṃ. Kāsāvakaṇṭhasaṅghe dinnadakkhiṇāpi guṇasaṅkhāyeva asaṅkhyeyyāti vuttā. Saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā hi saṅghe cittīkāraṃ kātuṃ sakkontassa hoti, saṅghe pana cittīkāro dukkaro hoti.
如果有人想“我要把供养献给僧团”,于是准备好要布施的东西,去到精舍,说:“尊者,请以僧团的名义给我指定一位长老。”如果他从僧团那里得到一位沙弥,就心里起了变化,想“我得到的是沙弥”,那他的供养就不算献给僧团的供养。即使得到的是大长老,即使他高兴地想“我得到大长老了”,那也一样不算。反过来,不论从僧团那里得到的是沙弥、受具足戒的比丘、年轻比丘、长老、愚笨的人还是聪明的人,只要他没有分别心,坚定地想“我布施给僧团”,能够对僧团生起恭敬心,那他的供养才叫献给僧团的供养。据说住在海外的人就是这样做。巴利
Yo hi saṅghagataṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dassāmīti deyyadhammaṃ paṭiyādetvā vihāraṃ gantvā, – ‘‘bhante, saṅghaṃ uddissa ekaṃ theraṃ dethā’’ti vadati, atha saṅghato sāmaṇeraṃ labhitvā ‘‘sāmaṇero me laddho’’ti aññathattaṃ āpajjati, tassa dakkhiṇā saṅghagatā na hoti. Mahātheraṃ labhitvāpi ‘‘mahāthero me laddho’’ti somanassaṃ uppādentassāpi na hotiyeva. Yo pana sāmaṇeraṃ vā upasampannaṃ vā daharaṃ vā theraṃ vā bālaṃ vā paṇḍitaṃ vā yaṃkiñci saṅghato labhitvā nibbematiko hutvā saṅghassa demīti saṅghe cittīkāraṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, tassa dakkhiṇā saṅghagatā nāma hoti. Parasamuddavāsino kira evaṃ karonti.
在这里,有一位护寺的居士家主心想:“我要把供养献给僧团。”于是请僧团指定一位比丘,说:“请给我一位比丘。”他得到了一位破戒的比丘,就把那人要坐的地方打扫干净,铺好座位,在上面挂起华盖,用香料、熏香和鲜花供养,又为他洗脚、涂油,就像在向佛陀作最崇高的礼敬一样,怀着对僧团的恭敬心,把布施之物送了出去。午后,那位比丘为了修缮寺院,来到他家门口说:“给我一把锄头。”居士就坐在原地,用脚把锄头踢过去,说:“拿去吧。”人们见了便对他说:“您早上对这位尊者那样的礼敬,简直没法形容,现在却连一点起码的表示都没有,这是怎么回事?”居士回答说:“那是我对僧团的恭敬,不是对他个人的。”那么,献给“袈裟缠颈僧团”的布施,由谁来净化呢?由舍利弗、目犍连等八十位大上座来净化。而且,即使那些上座早已般涅槃,从他们开始,直到今天仍然在世的诸漏尽者,也一样在净化它。巴利
Tattha hi eko vihārasāmi kuṭumbiko ‘‘saṅghagataṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dassāmī’’ti saṅghato uddisitvā ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ dethāti yāci. So ekaṃ dussīlabhikkhuṃ labhitvā nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ opuñjāpetvā āsanaṃ paññāpetvā upari vitānaṃ bandhitvā gandhadhūmapupphehi pūjetvā pāde dhovitvā telena makkhetvā buddhassa nipaccakāraṃ karonto viya saṅghe cittīkārena deyyadhammaṃ adāsi. So bhikkhu pacchābhattaṃ vihārajagganatthāya kudālakaṃ dethāti gharadvāraṃ āgato, upāsako nisinnova kudālaṃ pādena khipitvā ‘‘gaṇhā’’ti adāsi. Tamenaṃ manussā āhaṃsu – ‘‘tumhehi pātova etassa katasakkāro vattuṃ na sakkā, idāni upacāramattakampi natthi, kiṃ nāmeta’’nti. Upāsako – ‘‘saṅghassa so ayyā cittīkāro, na etassā’’ti āha. Kāsāvakaṇṭhasaṅghassa dinnadakkhiṇaṃ pana ko sodhetīti? Sāriputtamoggallānādayo asīti mahātherā sodhentīti. Apica therā ciraparinibbutā, there ādiṃ katvā yāvajja dharamānā khīṇāsavā sodhentiyeva.
阿难,我绝不会以任何方式说“对僧团的布施……”在这里,有以佛为上首的僧团,有现在的僧团,有未来身着袈裟的僧团。以佛为上首的僧团,不应与现在的僧团相提并论;现在的僧团,也不应与未来身着袈裟的僧团相提并论。应当各按各自的时代来说。因为,从僧团中指定后接受的凡夫沙门,就等同于按个人来供养的入流者;而对于能对僧团生起恭敬心的人来说,布施给凡夫沙门果报更大。从僧团中指定后接受的入流者,就等同于按个人来供养的一来者等等,道理也是如此。因为,对于能对僧团生起恭敬心的人来说,比起布施给诸漏已尽者,布施给从僧团中指定后接受的破戒者,果报反而更大。然而,“大王,布施给持戒者有大果报,布施给破戒者则不是这样”这句话,应当放下上述理路,放在“阿难,有这四种布施的清净”这一组四种当中来看待。巴利
Na tvevāhaṃ, ānanda, kenaci pariyāyena saṅghagatāya dakkhiṇāyāti ettha atthi buddhappamukho saṅgho, atthi etarahi saṅgho, atthi anāgate kāsāvakaṇṭhasaṅgho. Buddhappamukho saṅgho etarahi saṅghena na upanetabbo, etarahi saṅgho anāgate kāsāvakaṇṭhasaṅghena saddhiṃ na upanetabbo. Tena teneva samayena kathetabbaṃ. Saṅghato uddisitvā gahitasamaṇaputhujjano hi pāṭipuggaliko sotāpanno, saṅghe cittīkāraṃ kātuṃ sakkontassa puthujjanasamaṇe dinnaṃ mahapphalataraṃ. Uddisitvā gahito sotāpanno pāṭipuggaliko sakadāgāmītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Saṅghe cittīkāraṃ kātuṃ sakkontassa hi khīṇāsave dinnadānato uddisitvā gahite dussīlepi dinnaṃ mahapphalatarameva . Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlavato kho, mahārāja, dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ, no tathā dussīle’’ti, taṃ imaṃ nayaṃ pahāya ‘‘catasso kho imānanda, dakkhiṇā visuddhiyo’’ti imasmiṃ catukke daṭṭhabbaṃ.
381 布施从施者方面得到清净:这是说,因为有大果报所以清净,意思就是成为大果报。善法是指清净的法,不是邪恶的法。关于布施从施者方面得到清净,这里应当讲韦桑德拉大王的故事。因为他把自己的孩子布施给了那个乞讨的婆罗门,大地都为之震动。巴利
381.Dāyakato visujjhatīti mahapphalabhāvena visujjhati, mahapphalā hotīti attho. Kalyāṇadhammoti sucidhammo, na pāpadhammo. Dāyakato visujjhatīti cettha vessantaramahārājā kathetabbo. So hi jūjakabrāhmaṇassa dārake datvā pathaviṃ kampesi.
“从受者方面得清净”这句话里,应当讲一讲住在迦利雅尼河口的那位渔夫。据说,他三次把钵食布施给长索马长老,后来躺在临终的床上时说:“我布施给长索马长老的那份钵食,正在把我救拔出来啊。”巴利
Paṭiggāhakatovisujjhatīti ettha kalyāṇīnadīmukhadvāravāsikevaṭṭo kathetabbo. So kira dīghasomattherassa tikkhattumpi piṇḍapātaṃ datvā maraṇamañce nipanno ‘‘ayyassa maṃ dīghasomattherassa dinnapiṇḍapāto uddharatī’’ti āha.
不是给予者,因此这里要讲的是住在瓦达玛那的猎人。据说他做亡者布施时,只对一位破戒的人就布施了三次。到第三次时,那非人(受回向的亡魂)大叫:“这个破戒者抢我的功德!”后来他布施给一位持戒比丘,就在布施刚刚送达的那一刻,果报就来到了他那里。巴利
Neva dāyakatoti ettha vaḍḍhamānavāsiluddako kathetabbo. So kira petadakkhiṇaṃ dento ekassa dussīlasseva tayo vāre adāsi, tatiyavāre ‘‘amanusso dussīlo maṃ vilumpatī’’ti viravi, ekassa sīlavantabhikkhuno datvā pāpitakāleyevassa pāpuṇi.
“布施从施主方面也能清净”:在这里,应当讲说“无与伦比的布施”的故事。巴利
Dāyakato ceva visujjhatīti ettha asadisadānaṃ kathetabbaṃ.
那位布施要从施主方面来判断是否清净。在这里,就好比一个聪明的农夫,即使得到一块贫瘠的田地,也会按时耕作,把土块清除掉,播下优良的种子,日夜守护、从不懈怠,结果反而比别人的肥沃田地收获更多的谷物;同样地,持戒的人即使把东西布施给破戒的人,也能得到广大的果报。按照这个道理,在所有这些情况中,都应当知道清净是怎么一回事。巴利
Sā dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhatīti ettha yathā nāma cheko kassako asārampi khettaṃ labhitvā samaye kasitvā paṃsuṃ apanetvā sārabījāni patiṭṭhapetvā rattindivaṃ ārakkhe pamādaṃ anāpajjanto aññassa sārakhettato adhikataraṃ dhaññaṃ labhati, evaṃ sīlavā dussīlassa datvāpi phalaṃ mahantaṃ adhigacchatīti. Iminā upāyena sabbapadesu visujjhanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“离贪者布施给离贪者”这句话里,“离贪者”指的是不来者(阿那含),而阿拉汉则是彻底离贪的。所以,阿拉汉布施给阿拉汉,才是最高的布施。为什么?因为他们已经不再贪恋生存的居所,也不再希求再生。有人会问:漏已尽的人难道不相信布施的果报吗?相信布施果报的人,并不等同于漏已尽的人。漏已尽的人所做的行为,因为已经完全没有了欲贪,所以既不是善也不是不善,只是唯作而已。正因如此,他们说这样的布施才是最高的。巴利
Vītarāgo vītarāgesūti ettha vītarāgo nāma anāgāmī, arahā pana ekantavītarāgova, tasmā arahatā arahato dinnadānameva aggaṃ. Kasmā? Bhavālayassa bhavapatthanāya abhāvato. Nanu khīṇāsavo dānaphalaṃ na saddahatīti? Dānaphalaṃ saddahantā khīṇāsavasadisā na honti. Khīṇāsavena katakammaṃ pana nicchandarāgattā kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā na hoti, kiriyaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, tenevassa dānaṃ aggaṃ hotīti vadanti.
那么,是正自觉者布施给舍利弗长老的果报大,还是舍利弗长老布施给正自觉者的果报大呢?他们说:是正自觉者布施给舍利弗长老的果报大。因为除了正自觉者以外,再没有别人能真正了知布施的果报。布施如果具备四种圆满,就能在当生就给出果报。这四种圆满是:所施之物是以如法、公平、不压迫、不伤害他人的方式获得的;以布施前的思等各阶段来说,思心所极为广大;因为施者是漏尽者,功德格外超胜;以及受施者当天刚从灭定中出定,因此福田具足圆满。巴利
Kiṃ pana sammāsambuddhena sāriputtattherassa dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ, udāhu sāriputtattherena sammāsambuddhassa dinnanti. Sammāsambuddhena sāriputtattherassa dinnaṃ mahapphalanti vadanti. Sammāsambuddhañhi ṭhapetvā añño dānassa vipākaṃ jānituṃ samattho nāma natthi. Dānañhi catūhi sampadāhi dātuṃ sakkontassa tasmiṃyeva attabhāve vipākaṃ deti. Tatrimā sampadā – deyyadhammassa dhammena samena paraṃ apīḷetvā uppannatā, pubbacetanādivasena cetanāya mahattatā, khīṇāsavabhāvena guṇātirekatā, taṃdivasaṃ nirodhato vuṭṭhitabhāvena vatthusampannatāti.